You are on page 1of 206

Video Product

DC10 E, DC20 E
No. D17-9213, 9313 Digital Video Camera

iPAL

c CANON INC. 2005

Canon Inc. Digital Imaging Products Service & Quality Assurance Dept. First Edition : Sep. 2005 First Print : Sep. 2005

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


CONTENTS
1. Product Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 Development Concept ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-2 List of Main Features -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-2-1 High Image Quality ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-2-2 Advanced Functions and Comfortable Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-3 Product Specifications Comparison Chart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 1-4 Function and Performance List --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 2. Technical Explanation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 2-1 Design Concept ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 2-2 TS Mech --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15 2-2-1 Overview of TS Mech ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15 2-2-2 Main Mechanical Parts ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 3. Performance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 4. System Diagram (Common to all Models) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1. Product Overview
1-1 Development Concept

Slim and stylish design

Compatibility with DVD players

Slim-line body

DVD-R/RW

High image quality for both movies and still images

Direct Print

DIGIC DV

Megapixel CCD

Easy Direct (Print/Share) button that supports PictBridge

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-2 List of Main Features


1-2-1 High Image Quality
(1) Total pixels/CCD size DC10 E : approx. 1.33-megapixel, 1/4-inch CCD (color correction filter) featured DC20 E : approx. 2.20-megapixel, 1/3.9-inch CCD (primary color filter) featured (2) Effective pixels DC10 E Still image (CARD/DISC) : Video (DISC only) : 4:3 Widescreen TV (IS OFF) Widescreen TV (IS ON) DC20 E Still image (CARD/DISC) : Video (DISC only) : 4:3 Widescreen TV (IS OFF) Widescreen TV (IS ON) (3) High-performance, high-magnification zoom lens included Optical magnification ----------------------- 10 Nominal focal length ----------------------- 4.05 - 40.5 mm 35 mm film equivalent (at 4:3) -------------- DC10 E : Approx. 46.7 - 467 mm ----------------------- DC20 E : Approx. 40.6 - 406 mm * Lens configuration (same as MVX1 Si E, MVX1 S E) Lens configuration of 11 elements in nine groups with one aspherical lens used (double-sided aspherical lens), gradation ND incorporated, F/1.8 to 2.8 (4) DIGIC DV video engine included Approx. 2.00-megapixel (1632 [H] 1224 [V]) Approx. 1.77-megapixel (1536 [H] 1152 [V]) Approx. 1.50-megapixel (1632 [H] 918 [V]) Approx. 1.38-megapixel (1568 [H] 882 [V]) Approx. 1.23-megapixel (1280 [H] 960 [V]) Approx. 860,000 pixels (1072 [H] 804 [V]) Approx. 920,000 pixels (1280 [H] 720 [V]) Approx. 790,000 pixels (1184 [H] 666 [V])

1-2-2 Advanced Functions and Comfortable Operation Shooting Functions


(1) Camera mode 1) Disc movie mode, 2) disc still image mode , 3) card still image mode Provided as options for the movie mode in 1) are the XP high-image-quality mode (approx. 20 minutes), SP normal mode (approx. 30 minutes), and LP long-play mode (approx. 60 minutes). (2) Discs supported 8 cm DVD-R/-RW discs (double-sided type: 2.8 GB/single-sided type : 1.4 GB) (3) Video recording specification Movie DVD-RW : DVD Video Recording (VR mode) and DVD-VIDEO (VIDEO mode). DVD-R : DVD-VIDEO (VIDEO mode) only. Compression method / movie : MPEG2 Audio:Dolby Digital 2 channels (AC-3 2 channels) [ Still image Exif Ver2.2 compliant( DPOF not supported by discs) , Compression method:JPEG ]

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT (4) Many program AE options (same as MVX1 Si E, MVX1 S E but a 3-position slide switch is featured) 1) AUTO, 2) P (P, Tv, Av mode), 3) SCN SCN (special scene) mode can be selected to enable optimum shooting of the eight types of scenes below. <1> Portrait : This is used to defocus the background to set off the subject to be shot. <2> Sports <3> Night <4> Snow <5> Beach : This is used to shoot fast-moving subjects during tennis matches and games of golf, for instance. : This enables subjects to appear lighter in color even at night time or when the scene is otherwise dark. : This prevents the subject from appearing too dark and enables it to be shot clearly on the ski slopes in winter where the glare from the snow is strong. : This prevents the subject from appearing too dark and enables it to be shot clearly on the beach in summer where the glare from the water is strong.

<6> Sunset : This enables sunsets to be shot brightly and in vivid color. <7> Spotlight : This enables sharper shooting of scenes lit by a spotlight or other light source. <8> Fireworks : This enables the shooting of fireworks. (5) In addition to the MENU button, a FUNC. button is now provided, which enables setting of the following functions. Camera mode * Program AE (P), shutter-priority AE (Tv), aperture-priority AE (Av), and the special scene settings <1> through <8> described above. * Photometry system settings (evaluative photometry, center-weighted average photometry and spot photometry ... P position during still image shooting), * White balance (Auto, Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten, Fluorescent, Fluorescent H, Set), * Image effects (Vivid, Neutral, Low sharpening, Soft skin detail, Custom), * Drive mode settings (single shooting, continuous shooting, high-speed continuous shooting, AEB, stitch assist) --- in card still image mode only, * Image quality mode setting (XP, SP, LP) * Faders (in movie recording mode only), * Effects (in camera mode only), * Multi-screen settings (in movie recording mode only), * Card Mix, * Still image simultaneous recording settings, * Image size settings, * Still image quality settings During still image playback mode * Erase image , * Image protect, * Slideshow, * Print selection (in card still image mode only), * Transfer selection (in card still image mode only), * (Photo) movie conversion (in disc still image mode only) During video playback Original : * Divide, * Delete, * Add to playlist Playlist : * Move, * Divide, * Delete, (6) Mini-video light included (DC20 E only) This light has about three times the lighting capability of the white LED used on previous models, enabling close-up subjects to be shot even in the dark. It can be turned on by pressing a button in any program mode. Furthermore, even in the night mode, it can light up (mini video light priority) just as the conventional white LED could. (7) Includes 2.5-inch, 123,000-pixel, TFT color LCD monitor Includes BACKLIGHT button Employing ultra-high-brightness LEDs ( 3) yields higher brightness levels, smaller dimensions, reduced power consumption, and greater environmental friendliness. An AG (anti-glare) + AR (anti-reflection) coating is provided to enable easy visibility of the subject even when viewing the LCD screen under direct sunlight. While keeping the gradient reproducibility the same for the white side, the black side was narrowed to improve the contrast, and the LCD image quality is switched based on changes in camera image quality when switching modes for allowing smooth transition between the image quality of movies and still images. (8) Wind screen (WS) function (ON/OFF) (9) Exposure compensation Exposure locking by operating omni selector (top). Also, the exposure can be adjusted to a maximum of 11 levels (2.75EV) by moving the omni selector to the left and right.

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT (10) Auto slow shutter function (set by the MENU button) The slow-side shutter speeds for Auto mode were expanded. During movie : 1/50 sec 1/25 sec During still image : 1/25 sec 1/12.5 sec This enables shooting of subjects in low brightness. (11) Widescreen TV (WIDE SCREEN) shooting (16:9)

Functions for Recording Still Images on Cards and Discs (Movie Cannot be Recorded on Cards)
(1) miniSD card used (same as MVX1 Si E, MVX1 S E) (2) 9-point range-finding frame AiAF function Includes Ai (Artificial intelligence) AF function where the camera automatically selects from 9 range-finding frames on the screen in Disc/Card Camera mode. The range-finding frame can be switched between the automatic selection function and center range-finding frame. AUTO mode is AiAF only. (Selection of the range-finding frame is not possible.) (3) Metering system (same as MVX1 Si E, MVX1 S E) In P, Tv, and Av modes, the metering system can be selected from evaluative metering, center-weighted average metering, and spot metering (spot metering is center frame only). (4) Still image sizes (for both cards and discs) 1632 1224 (DC20 E only), 1280 960, 640 480, Super fine, Fine, Normal can be set. (5) Continuous shooting function (in card still image mode only) VGA : Up to 60 continuous frames can be shot at high-speed and normal continuous. (6) AEB shooting (in card still image mode only) Enables shooting of 3 frames with automatic changes in exposure (Normal, -0.5EV, +0.5EV). This allows the user to select the optimal exposure from the 3 frames afterward. The main differences between the disc still image mode and card still image mode are as follows.
Continuous shooting Disc still image mode Card still image mode High-speed continuous shooting AEB DPOF compatibility

Protect

Transfer order

Photo stitch

(7) Built-in flash (light guide flash) included (DC20 E only) (8) Still image check time setting (in card still image mode only) After releasing the Photo button, the display time can be set (6 levels) for checking the still images. (9) Still images (640 480) can be recorded on cards by operating the Photo button during disc movie shooting (this cannot be done during playback).

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Comfortable Operation/Miscellaneous
(1) New omni selector adopted (2) Finalize button included (3) Lens cover incorporated inside the body (same as MVX1 Si E, MVX1 S E) (4) PRINT/SHARE button included

(1)

(2)

(4)

When connected to a Direct printer, pressing the button when it is lit blue will print the still image displayed on the LCD monitor. When connected to a computer, files selected on the LCD monitor can be transferred. Also, the contents of finalized 8 cm discs can be recorded onto 12 cm discs loaded inside the PC. (Refer to Roxio My DVD for Canon.) (5) Direct Print (supported in both card still image and disc still image modes) PictBridge-compatible printers only (6) DPOF print selection (image transfer is also possible)...in card still image mode only (7) Exif 2.2 (Exif Print) compliant (supported in both card still image and disc still image modes) (8) New compact remote control Omni selector featured, lithium battery CR2025 used, remote control sensor settings not possible (ON/OFF only) (9) Battery charging function (10) Display of Digital Effects/Fade animation (only in disc movie recording mode; no display during playback) When the Digital Effects/Fade function is to be selected, the function effects are displayed (previewed) using animations so the special effects best suited to the scenes can be selected, and shooting (playback) can be performed with those effects added. (11) Playback zoom: Max. 5 zoom (still image only ) (12) 10 languages supported :German, English, Spanish, Italian, Russian, French, Chinese (simplified), Chinese (traditional), Korean, and Japanese (13) Built-in rechargeable lithium backup battery (14) Disc initialization function Function that displays the disc initialization menu to enable the VR mode or VIDEO mode to be selected and used when an unformatted disc is loaded. Only the VIDEO mode can be selected for DVD-R discs which are automatically initialized in the VIDEO mode after they have been recognized. (15) Function for copying still images from cards to discs and vice versa (function for copying all images provided) (16) Disc editing functions : 1. Original image editing: Function for editing original images (scenes) in VR mode recording. scenes can be deleted or divided or adding to Playlist. Note : This technical document defines a scene as a single shot which extends from when the record button is initially pressed to when it is pressed again to stop the recording. 2. Playlist editing (in VR mode recording ) / (* Refer to the technical description P.21) A playlist is defined as a list of scenes which are arranged in the desired playback sequence and whose images are displayed as thumbnails (6 thumbnails per screen). All the editing functions of the original images and playlist images listed in the table below can be used. The original images remain unaffected even when the playlist is edited.
Original image editing Delete scene (Note) Divide scene Move scene Adding to playlist Delete all playlist Playlist editing

Note : When images are recorded in the DVD-VIDEO mode (-RW disc), only the scene which has just been shot can be deleted. 3. Disc title : Function for giving each disc a name (consisting of alphanumerics and symbols); up to 20 characters can be input per name. If the disc has not been finalized, titles can be added to all discs and in all recording modes. 4. Disc protection function: Function for protecting what has been recorded or edited on a disc by disabling further recording or editing. However, discs can still be initialized. 5. Creating Photo movies: Function for converting still images (JPEG compressed) on discs into MPEG movies. Playlists can be edited, and the movies can be played back on a DVD player. Function for creating collections of Photo movies provided.

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT (17) Execute/release finalizing (finalizing can be released only for DVD-RW discs) (18) Accessories (same as MVX1 Si E, MVX1 S E) Tele-Converter TL-H27, Wide Converter WD-H27, Filter Set FS-H27U Battery Pack BP-208 (850 mAh), Battery Charger CG-300 (E), Multi Cable MTC-100 (19) MY DVD software (Roxio MyDVD for Canon) This software makes it easy to burn original DVDs on home-use personal computers. It makes it possible to import video and sound from a DVD camera and burn DVDs which can then be played back on a DVD player purchased on the market. For more details on these functions, visit the Japanese site at http://www.sonicjapan.co.jp/index.html or the U.S. site at http:// www.sonic.com/default.asp. Also joining the ranks of above functions is another function (One-Touch Dubbing) for recording data on the DVD disc in a PC simply by operating the Easy Direct (PRINT/SHARE) button on the body provided that the camcorder and PC are connected by the USB interface (Hi-Speed class supported). This function works only with the Windows XP and subsequently released PC operating systems. Furthermore, it operates on condition that the disc inside the DC10 E, DC20 E has been finalized and that a blank disc has been loaded into the PCs DVD drive.

Blank Disc User pushes Easy direct button (PRINT/SHARE button)

8cm DVD-R/RW 1.4GB


Recorded and finalized disc

Easy direct button lights up

12cm DVD Disc (4.7GB)

Hi-speed USB2.0
DC10 E DC20 E

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-3 Product Specifications Comparison Chart


Specifications Lens Movie Still image CCD 1/4-inch, 1.33-megapixel color correction filter Image stabilizer Electronic system (number of effective pixels 850,000 pixels) Monitor EVF High-resolution 16:9 Flash unit built into body White LED DISC Still image recording Movie recording Memory card Still image recording Movie recording USB Streaming Direct Print Headphone/ microphone terminal AV/S input/output terminal Battery included with unit Multi Cable MTC-100 (no line input) BP-208 (850mAh) 8cm DVD-R/-RW 1280 960 (approx. 1.23-megapixel) 1632 1224 (approx. 2.00-megapixel) DC10 E Lens10 optical zoom Lens10 optical zoom 1/3.9-inch, 2.2-megapixel RGB primary color filter Electronic system (number of effective pixels 1.77-megapixel) DC20 E

2.5-inch, 123,000-pixel LCD monitor 0.3-inch, 123,000-pixel color viewfinder Wide-screen display Light-guide flash unit Mini video light

MPEG2 (3/6/9Mbps) mini SD Card 1280 960 (approx. 1.23-megapixel) USB2.0 High Speed PictBridge supported only 1632 1224 (approx. 2.00-megapixel)

Functions deleted from past Video Cameras

No DV terminal, analog-to-digital conversion function, still image digital zoom function, audio dubbing, My Camera function or audio level display

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-4 Function and Performance List


Item Camera Image sensor Image size System (filter) 1/4-inch CCD Interlacing (Color correction filter) Total pixels Number of effective pixels Movie Still image Lens Nominal focal length Optical zoom magnification Digital zoom magnification Magnification System F number Aperture leaves (Number of leaves) Zoom speed Filter diameter Noise reduction Camera Movie Movie 10 40/200 (selectable) CCD readout F1.8 to 2.8 2 leaves Continuously varying speed 27mm P0.5 Either CCD-NR or Y/C-NR Still image 1.33-megapixel Approx. 850,000 pixels (4:3) Approx. 1.23-megapixel 4.05 to 40.5 mm 1/3.9-inch CCD Interlacing (RGB primary color filter) 2.20-megapixel Approx. 1.77-megapixel (4:3) Approx. 2.00-megapixel DC10 E DC20 E

Still image Chroma-only, median filter Recorder Minimum illumination Image stabilizer Auto mode (with auto slow shutter selected) Night mode Image stabilization system Sensing method Shooting functions AE mode Program AE AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach, Sunset, Spotlight, Fireworks Photometric system Center weighted average photometry Evaluation photometry (128segments) + All area photometry No photometry Movie/ Still image Evaluation photometry (128-segments) Evaluation photometry (128segments) + All area photometry Photometry options Still image Av, Tv, P mode (Selectable from evaluative photometry, center-weighted average photometry, and spot photometry) Exposure adjustment AE lock AE shift Exposure correction Gain setting/Higher sensitivity Backlight correction Omni selector up button operation (Prohibited during AUTO mode) Correction by right and left operation of the omni selector ( 11 steps) Auto Still image Spotlight, Snow, Beach, Sunset Movie AUTO, Portrait, Sports, Night Fireworks Movie Spotlight, Snow, Beach, Sunset Movie AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night C-NR system 6 lx 0.5 lx Electronic system Angular velocity sensing 14 lx 1.3 lx

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


Item Shooting functions Shutter speed Shutter speed setting (in Tv mode) Auto mode Movie 9 levels (1/6, 1/12.5, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000) DC10 E DC20 E

Still image 9 levels (1/2, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12.5, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500) Movie 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON), 1/50 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF) Still image 1/12.5 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON), 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF)

Low Light mode Night mode Aperture value (in Av mode) Auxiliary light source Video light (external) Mini video light Flash

None 1/2 to 1/500 sec (Disc/Card) Auto iris (F1.8, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0, 9.5,11, 14, 16) Not supported Built-in (when flash is used, Red-eye Reduction function provided; low-luminance AF auxiliary light) (Vivid, Neutral, Low Sharpening, Soft Skin Detail) (Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, and Color Depth) Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten, Fluorescent, Fluorescent H TTL, 128 segments AF/MF, forced infinity Right and left operation after pressing the omni selector down button Movie display when center selected) Still image (AiAF selection: 9-point range-finding frame display, center only Built-in model, accessory shoe not supported

Image quality adjustment White balance

Image effects functions Custom functions Auto Preset Systems

Focus

Mode Correction means Range finding frame display

Zoom Widescreen TV (WIDESCREEN)

Speed Recording system Movie

Continuously variable speed (no levels) supported (High image quality 16:9) Movie Still image Auto Fade, Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror Black & White Lumi. key/Chroma key/Camera Chroma key/Animation (Corner Animation, Straight Animation and Random Animation) Still image (Disabled in Auto mode and Night mode) 1/25sec Manual, Fast (4 fields), Normal (6 fields), Slow (8 fields) Still image

Letterbox display Digital fade (Camera mode only)

Digital effects (Camera mode only)

Movie Still image

Card mix (Camera mode only)

Movie

Multi-screen (Camera mode only)

Movie Still image

Capture speed

Shutter speed

Shutter speed < 1/25sec Manual, Fast (4 fields), Normal (8 fields), Slow (12 fields) Multi-screen Movie shooting Mode Disc 4 / 9 / 16 8 cm DVD-R/-RW disc (double-sided type : 2.8 GB/single-sided type: 1.4 GB), No-cartridge type Card Not possible

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


Item Shooting functions Still image recording Compression method Single image Continuous shooting (card recording only) AEB (card recording only) Photo button Form JPEG Exposure correction amount (steps of 0, -0.5, +0.5) Dedicated still image button 1280 960, 640 480 Super Fine, Fine, Normal 10 sec miniSD memory card ON/OFF setting possible Dolby Digital 2 ch (AC-3 2 ch) ON/OFF setting (Built-in microphone only) Size Pixels Brightness adjustment Color adjustment Movable LCD monitor Size Pixels Brightness adjustment Movable PLAY mode Playback system Frame playback Slow playback (VR mode only) Forward direction scan Reverse direction scan 1 SP playback Skip Search Photo search Date search Index search End search Forward / Reverse (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16 speed) 1.5 (with audio), 5, 15, 25 speed 2.5, 5, 15, 25 speed Forward / Reverse 0.33-inch (TFT color) 123,000 pixels 2.5-inch 123,000 pixels Mirror shooting supported 1632 1224, 1280 960 640 480 Image quality External flash compatible Frame processing Negative-positive reversal Zebra pattern Color bar Self-timer Interval timer Clear scan Memory card REC Search REC Review Standby switch Power saving function (after recording has been continuously paused for 5 minutes) Displayed text recording Audio Wind screen EVF Movie DC10 E DC20 E

Pressed halfway down (Only during recording standby) Recording image size

10

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


Item PLAY mode Playback effects Playback zoom (5 zoom) D. effects Movie (Not possible during still image playback and movie playback) Date display/Camera data display Slide show Playback frame jump Audio dubbing AV insert Zero set memory Editing functions Original image editing (VR mode) Playlist editing (VR mode) Enter disc title Disc protect Create photo movie System Interface (terminal) Microphone input Headphone output DV terminal S-Video terminal AV terminal Editing terminal USB terminal Memory card file transfer Analog signal DV signal conversion Direct print Easy Direct (PRINT/SHARE) button Microphone attenuation Microphone level meter World clock Text titles Speaker Confirmation beep Tally lamp Remote control sensor Accessory shoe Video ID Custom keys Night mode key DV control My Camera Internal battery charging Backup power supply Battery pack power Output only, multi-jack Output only, multi-jack mini-B Receptacle (USB file transfer) (PictBridge-compatible printers only) (CA-570 connected) Built-in (rechargeable lithium battery) BP-208 lithium ion battery (Adding to Playlist, Delete, Divide) (Delete, Divide, Move, Delete All) Still image D. fade Movie Still image Multi screen Data code display Card DC10 E DC20 E

11

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

External View

Note : Figure shows DC 20 E. External differences from DC10 E : Only the flash and the mini video light in the front.

Fig. 1

12

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2. Technical Explanation
2-1 Design Concept
The photograph shows DC20 E.

* Circle grip styling for superior operability.


Circle grip with a key positioned at the arc of the disc area. Fits snugly in the users hand to assure superior operability.

* Distinctive and attractive rounded rear shape.


Design where the cylindrical shape of the lens continues from the front right through to the rear panel along the arc of the disc area. A sense that discs are used (which is distinctly different from tapes) felt when the semicircular rear cover is viewed from the LCD (right) side.

13

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Differences in external appearance between DC10 E and DC20 E 1. Paint color used for rear cover 2. Grip cover (DC20 E : painted; DC10 E : not painted) Differences in appearance by market The coloring of DC10 E and DC20 E is the reverse of the Japanese specification in overseas markets.

14

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-2 TS Mech
The TS Mech is the DVD drive newly developed for DVD cameras. It consists of a mechanical section and a control board.
TS Mech Size Depth Width Height Weight Playback/recording speed Usable disc 70 mm 84 mm 14.3 mm 100 g 2 DVD-R, DVD-RW (1.4 GB, 8 cm)

2-2-1 Overview of TS Mech

TS Mech
70mm 14.3mm

84mm

Fig. 2

15

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-2-2 Main Mechanical Parts

Spindle motor

Control board

Pick-up Closeup of Pick-up

Tracking motor

Suspension

Coil wiring material

Material of lens protection

Magnet

Cover

Magnet Coil wiring material Coil wiring material

Suspension

Fig. 3

16

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

3. Performance
1 Type 2 DVD recording modes 2-1 Movie DC10 E, DC20 E DVD video camera Either DVD-Video Recording (VR mode) or DVD-VIDEO (VIDEO mode). DVD-R discs support DVD-VIDEO only. Movie compression method: MPEG2, Audio compression method: Dolby Digital 2ch (AC-32ch) [ 2-2 Still Image 3 Recordable discs ]/sampling frequency 48 KHz

Complies with Exif Ver 2.2 (disc does not support DPOF), compression method : JPEG 8 cm DVD-R/-RW discs (double-sided type : 2.8 GB/single-sided type: 1.4 GB) *After shooting is completed for one side of a double-sided DVD, it is turned over and used. *1 : VBR stands for Variable Bit Rate. Average bit rate Movie recording time (double-sided : 2.8 GB/single-sided : 1.4 GB)

Estimated movie recording time Recording mode

XP (High image quality) SP (Standard) LP (Long play)

Approx. 9 Mbps (VBR *1) Approx. 6 Mbps (VBR) Approx. 3 Mbps (VBR)

Approx. 40 minutes / Approx. 20 minutes Approx. 60 minutes / Approx. 30 minutes Approx. 120 minutes / Approx. 60 minutes

4 Continuous battery shooting time/Actual shooting time, Continuous playback time *1 : Normal refers to the LCD brightness at the Normal setting. *2 : Bright refers to the LCD brightness at the Bright setting. DC10 E When viewfinder is used Continuous recording BP-208 XP Approx.75min Actual recording Approx.35 min Approx. 70 min (Normal*1) Approx. 70 min (Bright*2) SP Approx.80 min Approx.40 min Approx. 80 min (Normal*1) Approx. 75 min (Bright*2) LP Approx.95 min Approx.45 min Approx. 90 min (Normal*1) Approx. 85 min (Bright*2) Approx. 35 min (Normal) Approx. 35 min (Bright) Approx. 40 min (Normal) Approx. 40 min (Bright) Approx. 45 min (Normal) Approx. 40 min (Bright) DC20 E When viewfinder is used Continuous recording BP-208 XP Approx.65min Actual recording Approx.35 min Approx. 60 min (Normal*1) Approx. 60 min (Bright*2) SP Approx.70 min Approx.35 min Approx. 70 min (Normal*1) Approx. 65 min (Bright*2) LP Approx.80 min Approx.40 min Approx. 75 min (Normal*1) Approx. 75 min (Bright*2) Approx. 30 min (Normal) Approx. 30 min (Bright) Approx. 35 min (Normal) Approx. 30 min (Bright) Approx. 35 min (Normal) Approx. 35 min (Bright) Approx. 90 min (Normal) Approx. 80 min (Normal) Approx. 75 min (Normal) Continuous recording When LCD monitor is used Actual recording Continuous playback Approx. 100 min (Normal) Approx. 90 min (Normal) Approx. 80 min (Normal) Continuous recording When LCD monitor is used Actual recording Continuous playback

17

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


5 Camera 5-1 Image sensing device 5-1-1 Total pixels 5-1-2 Effective pixels Still image (CARD/DISC) Movie 4:3 16:9 (IS OFF) 16:9 (IS ON) 5-1-3 Filter 5-1-4 Signal configuration 5-1-5 Scanning system 5-1-6 Minimum subject illumination Auto mode Night mode 5-1-7 Subject illumination range 5-2 Photo lens 5-2-1 Nominal focal length 5-2-2 35 mm film equivalent Still image

DC10 E : 1/4-inch interlaced CCD DC20 E : 1/3.9-inch interlaced CCD DC10 E : Approx. 1.33-megapixel DC20 E : Approx. 2.20-megapixel DC10 E : Approx. 1.23-megapixel (1280 [H] 960 [V]) DC20 E : Approx. 2.00-megapixel (1632 [H] 1224 [V]) DC10 E : Approx. 850,000 pixels (1067 [H] 800 [V]) DC20 E : Approx. 1.77-megapixel (1536 [H] 1152 [V]) DC10 E : Approx. 920,000 pixels (1280 [H] 720 [V]) DC20 E : Approx. 1.50-megapixel (1632 [H] 918 [V]) DC10 E : Approx. 790,000 pixels (1184 [H] 666 [V]) DC20 E : Approx. 1.38-megapixel (1568 [H] 882 [V]) DC10 E : Color correction filter DC20 E : RGB primary color filter PAL standard color TV signal 625 lines, 50 fields / 25 frames DC10 E : Approx. 6 lx (Shutter speed 1/25 sec) DC20 E : Approx. 14 lx (Shutter speed 1/25 sec) DC10 E : Approx. 0.5 lx (Shutter speed 1/2 sec) DC20 E : Approx. 1.3 lx (Shutter speed 1/2 sec) DC10 E : Approx. 0.5 lx to approx. 100,000 lx DC20 E : Approx. 1.3 lx to approx. 100,000 lx 4.05 - 40.5 mm Optical 10 zoom

DC10 E : Approx. 38.9 - 389 mm DC20 E : Approx. 38.1 - 381 mm Movie 4:3 mode DC10 E : Approx. 46.9 - 469 mm DC20 E : Approx. 40.6 - 406 mm Widescreen TV (16:9) IS-OFF DC10 E : Approx. 42.6 - 426 mm DC20 E : Approx. 41.6 - 416 mm IS-ON DC10 E : Approx. 46.1 - 461 mm DC20 E : Approx. 43.3 - 433 mm 5-2-3 Nominal diametric ratio F1.8-2.8 5-2-4 Lens configuration 11 elements in 9 groups including one aspherical lens (double-sided aspherical lens) and gradation ND featured 5-2-5 Focus adjustment Inner focus type. Manually adjustable (adjusted by SET dial) 5-2-6 Minimum object distance 10 mm (AF linked ; wide end), 1 m for full zoom area (from lens tip) 5-2-7 Power zoom Power zoom supporting continuously variable speed (no levels). Slide lever operation. Zoom speed can be adjusted by moving slide lever. Zoom speed (Tape recording) Optical zoom REC : Approx. 1.8 sec to approx. 30 sec, PAUSE : Approx. 1.1 sec to approx. 30 sec Electronic zoom REC : Approx. 2.6 sec to approx. 32 sec, PAUSE : Approx. 1.9 sec to approx. 32 sec 5-2-8 Focal length display None. Includes simple zoom display in viewfinder. 5-2-9 Macro mechanism Wide end macro 5-2-10 Macro shooting distance 10 mm (from lens front) 5-2-11 Filter diameter 27 mm P0.5 5-2-12 Accessory The following can be used: WD-H27, TL-H27, FS-H27U 5-2-13 Lens hood None 5-2-14 Lens cap Built-in type

18

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


5-3 Digital zoom Still image Movie

None DC10 E : - 40 / 200 DC20 E : - 40 / 200 35 mm equivalent (at 4:3) DC10 E : Approx. 1868 mm/9340 mm DC20 E : Approx. 1624 mm/8120 mm 5-4 Image stabilization function Included (Movie mode only) 5-4-1 System Electronic system 5-4-2 Camera shake detection system Angular velocity sensing (using piezoelectric vibration sensor) 5-5 Shooting modes 5-5-1 Movie camera Records movies in VIDEO mode or VR mode to 8 cm DVD-R/-RW discs (It is not possible to record using two standards at the same time on one disc). However, -R discs can record in VIDEO mode only, and still images (640 x 480) can be recorded while recording disc movies when a miniSD card is installed. 5-5-2 Still image camera Disc Still Image mode and Card Still Image mode can be selected using the MENU button. a. Disc mode Still images (JPEG compression) are recorded to a 8 cm DVD-R/-RW disc. (See section 6, DVD recorder unit) b. Card mode Still images (JPEG compression) are recorded to an miniSD memory card. Movie recording is not available. (Refer to the Memory Card System) Magnification 5-6 Exposure control 5-6-1 AE mode 5-6-2 Photometry system Movie AUTO, P (Program AE), Av (aperture priority AE), Tv (shutter priority AE), Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach, Sunset, Spotlight, Fireworks Center weighted average photometry : AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night All area average photometry + 128-segment (16H 8V) evaluative photometry : Spotlight, Snow, Beach, Sunset mode No photometry : SCN (Fireworks) ... (Fixed exposure : 1/50 sec) 128-segment frame evaluative photometry : AUTO, Portrait, Sports, Night All area average photometry + 128-segment (16H 8V) evaluative photometry : Spotlight, Snow, Beach, Sunset mode Selectable from 128-segment evaluative photometry, center-weighted average photometry, and spot photometry (center frame) : Av, Tv, and P (evaluative photometry is the default for these). Spot photometry is photometry for the center frame only. No photometry : SCN (Fireworks) ... (Fixed exposure : 2 sec) Exposure is locked by pressing the cross key (up).After the exposure is locked, the cross key can be used to move the right or left and correct the exposure (except in AUTO mode). 11 levels (-11 to 0 to +11, 2.75 EV) Indicated by exposure correction bar and number in the viewfinder.

Still image

5-6-3 Exposure correction function Exposure lock Exposure correction amount

19

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


5-6-4 Electronic shutter 5-6-4-1 In Auto mode Movie

5-6-4-2 5-6-4-3 5-6-4-4

5-6-4-5 5-6-4-6

1/30 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF) 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON) Still image 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF) 1/12.5 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON) When the image stabilizer is ON 1/100 When the image stabilizer is OFF 1/50 Slow Shutter mode None Av mode (Both Movie and Still image) Aperture setting F1.8, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0, 9.5, 11, 14, 16 Tv mode Shutter setting Movie : 1/6, 1/12.5*, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec Still image : 1/2, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12.5*, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500 sec *Display shows 12 Night mode Both Tape and Card : 1/2 - 1/500 sec Other modes P, Portrait, Sports, Snow, Beach and Sunset modes are same as Auto Slow Shutter Off in AUTO mode. Spotlight Movie : 1/50 sec only Still image : 1/25 sec to 1/100 sec Fireworks Movie : 1/50 sec only Still image : 2 sec only TTL-video signal sensing system AF Screen center Includes Ai (Artificial intelligence) AF function where the camera automatically selects from 9 range-finding frames on the screen and screen center function where range-finding is fixed at the center frame on the screen (not user selectable). Also, AiAF and fixed at center can be selected only when Focus Priority ON is selected. AF is fixed at the screen center during Stitch assist. None Included. The AF frame (including multiple locations/center AF frame for center fixed) that has come into focus is indicated by a green light. The AF frame appears with a yellow frame when the subject cannot be brought into focus or for slow shutter states with a shutter speed of 1/2 second or more to less than 1/6 second. 10 mm to infinity (Wide end), Full zoom area: 1 m to infinity (from lens front), Fireworks mode: Fixed at infinity. Approx. 50 lx - 100,000 lx Continuous AF/Manual focus. AF ON/OFF switching is possible in all except AUTO mode (manual focus operation is possible by right and left operation after pressing the cross key down button). During manual focus, the indicator appears in the viewfinder. Holding down the focus button (cross key down) for about three seconds sets to Infinity and displays in the viewfinder. 0.33-inch color LCD (approx. 123,000 pixels) ON when LCD monitor closed (panel facing inwards) and during mirror shooting Not possible (fixed) Not possible +1.5 to -5.5 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece) Single-lens configuration

5-7 AF (Auto Focus) 5-7-1 System 5-7-2 AF range finding area Movie Still image

5-7-3 Range-finding frame display Movie Still image

5-7-4 AF operating range 5-7-5 AF operation illumination range 5-7-6 AF mode switching

5-7-7 Forced infinity setting 5-8 Viewfinder 5-8-1 5-8-2 5-8-3 5-8-4 Rotation Detaching eyepiece Diopter movement range Lens configuration

20

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


5-9 LCD panel 2.5-inch color LCD Approx. 123,000 pixels (560 [H] 220 [V]) TFT active-matrix drive. RGB delta arrangement; ON when LCD monitor not closed (when panel faces inwards) Angle adjustment Possible. Monitoring is possible for high-angle, low-angle, and mirror shooting. Information display Color display of operating mode, simple zoom position, remaining battery charge, remaining disc space, time code, warnings and other indications. 10 languages supported : Japanese, Chinese (traditional), Chinese (simplified), English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Korean. A limited number of indicators are displayed during mirror shooting. LCD backlight adjustment (BACKLIGHT) Adjustment is possible using button operation. The setting switches between Bright to Dark each time the button is pressed. The default setting during battery operation is Dark. The default setting during compact power adapter (CA) operation is Bright. If the power supply is switched from battery operation to CA operation while the power is on, the setting made during CA operation is used (CA operation default setting is used if no setting was made). In the same way, if the power supply is switched from CA operation to battery operation while the power is on, the setting made during battery operation is used (battery operation default setting is used if no setting was made). Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder (CVF) Movie playback mode/ Still image playback mode LCD panel OFF ON ON ON CVF ON OFF OFF OFF

5-9-1 5-9-2

5-9-3

5-9-4

LCD panel position

Camera mode/Card Camera mode LCD panel CVF ON OFF OFF ON

Panel closed (panel facing inwards) Panel closed (panel facing outwards) Panel open Mirror shooting *1

OFF ON ON ON *2

*1 : In mirror mode, only the disc and self-timer indicators are displayed. *2 : Mirror mode possible by menu selection. 5-10 White balance adjustment TTL 128-segments, new white extraction system FAWB. Auto/Set/Preset. Presets are available : Daylight : 5400 K; Shade : 8000 - 8500 K; Cloudy : 6000 K; Tungsten (incandescent lamps and halogen bulbs) : 3000 K; Fluorescent H (3-wavelength type fluorescent) : 6500 K; Fluorescent (white fluorescent) : 4000 K. Presets are not possible in SNC and AUTO modes. 2,800K to 8,000K The following modes are provided : Fader, Effects, Multi-screen Fader : Linked to Start/Stop button. Can be used 1 time when Fade mode displayed. (Mode indication goes out when Fader ends.) Effects : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF. Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until mode is turned OFF. Audio synchronized fader Auto Fade (Japanese model : Fade to white, Overseas model: Fade to black), Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide Approx. 4 sec Black & White, Sepia, Art, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror (only Black & White is available during Disc/Card Still Image Recording mode) Except in Night mode, Auto mode 4 (2 2), 9 (3 3), 16 (4 4) Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames) Card Chroma key, Card Lumi. key, Camera Chroma key, Card Animation (Sample images are included in the supplied CD.) 32 levels Corner Animation, Straight Animation, and Random Animation See section 12, Relationship between DC10 E, DC20 E functions and modes.

5-10-1 Adjustment range 5-11 Digital feature functions

5-11-1 Fader

5-11-1-1 Fade time 5-11-2 Effects 5-11-3 Multi-screen 5-11-3-1 Number of screens 5-11-3-2 Operation mode 5-11-4 Card Mix 5-11-4-1 Mix type 5-11-4-2 Mix level adjustment 5-11-4-3 Card animation 5-11-5 Operation mode

21

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


5-12 Built-in microphone 5-12-1 Wind screen function 5-13 Built-in Flash Shooting (DC20 E only) 5-13-1 Flash modes 5-13-2 Shutter speed 5-13-3 Shooting distance 5-14 Auxiliary light source (DC20 E only) 5-14-1 Flash mode 5-15 Other additional functions 5-15-1 Disc counter 5-15-2 Data code a. Time and date Stereo (using electret condenser microphone) Omni-directional microphone 2 + Electric circuitry for stereo Included. With ON/OFF switch (Menu selection. Available for built-in microphone only) Pre-flash light adjustment system Auto flash, auto flash with red-eye reduction, manual flash, flash off Flash On : Flash at 1/1000 sec or less in Movie mode and at 1/500 sec or less in Still Image mode. Wide end, approx. 80 cm to 2.5 m, Tele end, approx. 1 m to 1.3 m The allowable shooting range is indicated as approx. 1 to 2 m in the Instruction Manual. Includes mini video light (equipped with high-brightness white LED) with light button. Enables shooting at distances of approx. 1.5 m in AUTO mode. The AF auxiliary light is set to Auto when AF Auxiliary Auto is selected and when red-eye reduction function is selected. The AF auxiliary light is OFF in Fireworks mode. The total cumulative time for a recoding scene is indicated by hours: minutes: seconds. The date and camera information during recording are automatically recorded and can be displayed during playback. Automatic calendar range: January 1, 2005 through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting is January 1, 2005) The recording start (year/month/day) display can be selected from the three options below:

b. Camera data

Supports world clock (Selecting the city name of your destination automatically adjusts to the date and time of the destination. Supports daylight saving time), and records the recording start time (hour/minute/second). Shutter speed and aperture value information are recorded (but not displayed during recording), and can be displayed during playback. During playback, time can be displayed in five different modes (date only, time only, date and time, or date and time and camera data).

5-15-3 Accessory shoe 5-15-4 REC Search function 5-15-5 REC Review function

5-15-6 5-15-7 5-15-8

5-15-9

Not supported None Supported. Accessed by operating the Recording Check button when camera recording is paused. Plays back the movie from the beginning of the recorded scene and then returns to the state before playback started. There is no sound. Remote control reception ON/OFF Possible. This can be done in Camera mode and PLAY mode (by selecting from menu). Headphone volume adjustment Not available (Headphone terminal not included) Widescreen TV (16:9) When Widescreen TV mode is selected (button setting), the LCD panel screen changes to letterbox display (top and bottom of the screen are masked with black bands). Setting is possible in AUTO mode. Widescreen TV cannot be set under VIDEOmode and LP mode AEB shooting Recording is done in Card/Camera mode with exposure correction automatically changed to 0 level, -0.5 level, and +0.5 level. (Continuous shooting mode: when AEB is selected) Flash shooting is not possible. After releasing the Photo button, the display time can be set for checking the still images. One of 6 settings; OFF (0 sec), 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 seconds can be selected as the setting mode. No function No function The available image effect settings in the FUNC. menu are Vivid, Neutral, Low Sharpening, Soft Skin Detail, and Custom. These settings cannot be made in Special Scene mode. Emphasizes contrast and color depth, and presents images with vibrant and striking colors. Limits the contrast and color depth, and presents pure images without any enhancements. Provides image with less distinct outlines and a softer touch. Smoothes the outlines of skin sections, and presents skin sections with a softer tone. Enables adjustment of the brightness, contrast, sharpness, and color depth.

5-15-10 Still image check time setting 5-15-11 Microphone attenuation 5-15-12 Microphone level meter 5-15-13 Image effect settings Vivid Neutral Low Sharpening Soft Skin Detail Custom

22

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


6 DVD Recorder section 6-1 Recording functions 6-1-1 Movie

6-1-2 Still image

a. File name and folder name

Camera shooting and recording only (analog line input recording is not possible), movie and audio is recorded to 8 cm DVD-R/-RW disc. When set to Disc Movie mode, movies are recorded in a 8 cm DVD-R/-RW disc in VR mode or VIDEO mode. However, recording is only possible in VIDEO mode for 8 cm DVD-R discs (automatic setting). The image quality setting mode can be selected from XP, SP, or LP (FUNC. menu selection). When set to Disc Still Image mode, still images are recorded to a 8 cm DVD-R/-RW disc (JPEG compression). The available recording pixels are 1632 1224 (DC20 E only), 1280 960, 640 480, and the available image settings of Super Fine, Fine, and Normal. Still images cannot be recorded during movie playback. Based on the DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) and still image (Exif Ver 2.2) file management specifications/DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) file management specifications, the following names are assigned to recorded discs after initializing in the Initialization menu. Type JPEG JPEG Folder name and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/PIC_yyyy.JPG //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG

Types of files Still image (Exif 2.2) file ZoomBrowser

xxx : Folder No., yyy : File No., z : A to Z DCF folder and file name//DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx: Folder No., yyyy : File No., Internal management is performed based on folder number-file number. Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9900, and are stored in folders (100 files to a folder). Each folder is assigned numbers 100 to 998. 6-1-3 Estimated number of recordable still images on disc (single-sided type) Image size 1632 1224 (DC20 E only) 1280 960 Image quality mode S.Fine Fine Normal S.Fine Fine Normal 640 480 S.Fine Fine Normal Number of recorded images (VIDEO mode) Approx. 1025 Approx. 1585 Approx. 2910 Approx. 1630 Approx. 2495 Approx. 4595 Approx. 7945 9999 9999 Number of recorded images (VR mode) Approx. 1025 Approx. 1590 Approx. 2915 Approx. 1635 Approx. 2500 Approx. 4600 Approx. 7960 Approx.11680 (9999) *1 Approx.19470 (9999) *1

* The number of recordable images depends on the usage (subject and shooting) conditions. The number of images that can be recorded on a double-sided disc is twice that of a singlesided disc. *1 : The maximum display is 9999. 6-2 Playback functions 6-2-1 Playback disc 6-2-2 Playback type a. Standard Playback b. Forward search c. Reverse search d. Slow playback in both directions e. Scene search 8 cm DVD-R (DVD-VIDEO), 8 cm DVD-RW (DVD-VIDEO , DVD-VR) Video and audio (Dolby Digital 2ch) recorded in XP, SP, and LP modes 4 levels : 1.5 speed (with audio), 5 speed, 15 speed, and 25 speed 4 levels : 2.5 speed, 5 speed, 15 speed, and 25 speed 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16 speed, slow playback not possible in the DVD-VIDEO mode. Function plays the beginning of the current scene or the beginning of the next scene * The disc counter during playback displays the playback time from the beginning of the recorded scene only.

23

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


6-3 Editing functions 6-3-1 Original movie editing This function edits movies or dics This function edits original movies (scenes) recorded in VR mode. Deleting, dividing and adding to playlist is possible. When images are recorded in the DVD-VIDEO mode (-RW disc) only the scene which has just been shot can be deleted. The dividing of one phot-movie is not possible. This function enables editing of lists of the scene playback order in VR mode. Delete, Divide, Move, Erase Entire Playlist are available. With thumbnail display (6 thumbnails in 2 rows and 3 columns). This function enters an original name for the disc. Alphanumeric characters and symbols can be entered. The maximum number of input characters is 20 single-byte characters. The name can be confirmed on standalone players (depending on the player). The disk title input is possible in all disks and the recording modes in cases where they are not finalized. This function protects the disc by disabling recording and editing. However, discs can still be initialized. This function converts Disc Still Images (JPEG compression) to MPEG movies. Playlist editing and playback in a DVD player is possible for the still images. With single-operation photo movie creation function.The photo movie function is possible in all discs and the recording modes in cases where they are not finalized. This process enables playback in other players and recorders that support DVD-VIDEO and DVD-VR. In this finalization process, the shorter the recording time, the more dummy data is needed fill the remaining space, and this tends to result in a longer finalization time. Execute/ Cancel. When this finalization is performed, be aware that certain disc types and recording systems have limitations on additional recording, editing, and initializations. Includes display of finalization time and remaining finalization time. Finalization is not possible when using a battery pack. Finalization is possible when the Compact Power Adapter is connected. Be especially careful during finalization since the data can be corrupted if the Compact Power Adapter is disconnected during finalization. Additional recording DVD-R (VIDEO mode only) DVD-RW (VIDEO mode) DVD-RW (VR mode) * When the VIDEO mode (DVD-RW) is recorded, additional recording and editing become possible by releasing finalizing. The only editing operations are the input of disc title and deleting of a scene.(Deleting a scene is possible only for the image that has just been shot: it is not possible on a disc which has been removed from the body or played back. 6-5 Input signals 6-5-1 USB port only mini-B USB device class Supports USB 2.0 Hi-Speed class Enabled Enabled Enabled Not possible (*) Not possible (*) Enabled Not possible Editing Not possible Initialization Not possible

6-3-2 Playlist editing

6-3-3 Disc title

6-3-4 Disc protect 6-3-5 Create photo movie

6-4 Finalize

24

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


6-6 Output signals 6-6-1 DV terminal 6-6-2 Multi-pin a. Video signals Signal configuration Output Impedance Output Signal level Horizontal resolution Self recording/playback Camera EE OUT b. Audio signal Types of signals Output Impedance Output Signal level Frequency characteristics Audio signal S/N c. S-Video signal Signal configuration Video signals Impedance Signal level Horizontal resolution Self recording/playback Camera EE OUT 6-6-3 Headphone terminal 6-6-4 USB terminal USB device class Compatible computer systems PC operating system

None Flat type Multi 10-pole PAL standard color video signals 75 1 Vp-p (composite) Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center) Max. 530 TV lines (screen center) Catalog value: Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center) Stereo audio signal Max. 75 K 10 dBv (with 47 K load) 60 Hz to 16 KHz (Range between 1 KHz reference 3 dB) Min. 48 dB PAL Y/C separated video signal 1 Vp-p (luminance + sync signals) 75 K 0.3 Vp-p (Color burst signal) Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center) Max. 530 TV lines (screen center) Catalog value: Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center) None Supports USB 2.0 Hi-Speed class PTP class, mass storage class Windows : IBM PC/AT compatible, NEC PC98-NX Series Macintosh : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook Windows : Windows 98 SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP Macintosh : Mac OS X 10.1.5 or later MyDVD for Canon Software operates only on Windows ME, Windows 2000 (SP4), and Windows XP. miniSD memory card JPEG compression recording When [FINE] or [NORMAL] is selected in the FUNC. menu, still images (640 480) can be recorded to the memory card by pressing the photo button while movie is being recorded to disc. Still image is recorded using the Photo button (image size and image quality are selectable). Writing in Progress warning is displayed in the EVF/LCD. Not possible Not possible

6-7 Memory card system 6-7-1 Types of cards used 6-7-2 Recordable image types a. Still image Disc Camera mode Card Camera mode During video playback b. Movie

25

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


6-7-3 File names/folder names Based on the DCF (Design rule for Camera File systems) and still image (Exif 2.2) file management specifications / DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) file management specifications, the following names are assigned to recorded cards after initializing in the Initialization menu. CANON DV Types of files Still image (Exif 2.2) file PhotoStitch ZoomBrowser DPOF file DPOF automatic transmission file b. File number Type JPEG JPEG JPEG TEXT TEXT Folder name and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/IMG_yyyy.JPG //DCIM/xxxCANON/STz_yyyy.JPG //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG //MISC/AUTPRINT.MRK //MISC/AUTXFER.MRK

a. Card volume label

xxx : Folder No., yyy: File No., z: A to Z DCF folder and file name//DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx : Folder No., yyyy : File No., Internally managed by folder number-file number. Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9900, and are stored in folders (100 files to a folder). Each folder is assigned numbers 100 to 998. Relationship between folder No. and file No. Folder No. 101 102 198 200 998 9801 9802 9803 9899 9900 Photographed images start from 101-0101, and are numbered to be greater than Directory No. File No. of files saved on Memory Cards. 9801 9802 9803 9899 9900 0001 0002 0003 0099 0100 Recording area of photographed image File No. 0101 0102 0103 0199 0200 0201 0202 0203 0299 0300 Saved files

6-7-4 Recorded image size/image quality a. Still image recording During simultaneous movie recording 640 480 (VGA) / Switchable between Fine and Normal During still image recording 1632 1224 (DC20 E only), 1280 960, 640 480 / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and Normal During movie playback Not possible b. Movie recording Not possible 6-7-5 Number of recorded images (miniSD card) Image size (Still image) 1632 1224 (DC20 E only) 1280 960 Image quality S.Fine Fine Normal S.Fine Fine Normal 640 480 S.Fine Fine Normal Number of recorded images 16MB Card 9 14 25 15 20 40 75 105 170 32MB Card 20 30 55 30 50 90 165 285 365 64MB Card 40 65 120 65 105 195 340 470 750 128MB Card 85 135 250 140 215 395 690 955 1525 256MB Card 175 275 500 280 430 795 1380 1900 3040 Data size /1 card 1360KB 880KB 480KB 850KB 560KB 300KB 176KB 120KB 72KB

* The given number of recorded images is for reference only. The number varies greatly depending on the subject and other conditions when taking pictures. 6-7-6 Card initialization Initialization using the Initialization command in the menu of the main unit. Operation is not guaranteed with PC initializations as problems can occur with some OS.

26

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


6-7-7 Usable memory card miniSD memory card

SanDisk : 16MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB Matsushita Electric : 16MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB Toshiba : 16MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB 6-7-8 Number of continuous shots and number of stored continuous shots (card still image only) DC20 E Number of continuous shots recorded per second Image size 1632 1224 1280 960 640 480 Normal continuous shooting Approx. 2.1 images Approx. 2.5 images Approx. 2.5 images High-speed continuous shooting Approx. 2.5 images Approx. 4.2 images Approx. 4.2 images Flash recording Approx. 1.8 images Approx. 2.1 images Approx. 2.1 images Maximum continuousness number of recordable images 10 images 10 images 60 images

* The flash output is approx. 1/4 of the output when taking single shots. The number of recordable images when using the flash is identical to the Maximum continuousness number of recordable images in the table above. DC10 E Number of continuous shots recorded per second Image size 1280 960 640 480 6-8 Digital feature display 6-9 Direct print Normal continuous shooting Approx. 3.0 images Approx. 3.0 images High-speed continuous shooting Approx. 5.0 images Approx. 5.0 images Maximum continuousness number of recordable images 10 images 60 images

None Still images recorded on memory cards or discs can be easily printed through controls on the video camera by connecting to a CP-200/300 compact printer or PictBridge-compatible ( ) printer (sold separately), using the supplied IFC-300PCU interface cable. Only the still images (JPEG compression) which have been recorded on the miniSD memory cards or discs. Single image/eight-image print (only when the card size paper tray has been installed in CP200/ 300/220/330/400/500/600). Printing is not available from the index screen. Possible Possible (when connected to CP-220/330/400/500/600 or PictBridge-compatible printer) Easy Print : 1 to 99 sheets DPOF printing (miniSD memory card only) : Max. 998 images, 1 to 99 each

6-9-1 Printable images 6-9-2 Print format 6-9-3 Trimming 6-9-4 Date printing 6-9-5 Number of print copies

27

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


6-9-6 Print systems

Print manufacturer Printer specifications CP specifications

Canon CP specifications +PictBridge specifications


CP-200/3002nd/220/ 330/400/500/600

Other manufacturer BJ Photo specifications only CP specifications +PictBridge specifications


PIXUS 990i/900PD/ DS700

PictBridge specifications only

Suitable printer Printer specifications when connected to DC10 E/ DC20 E

CP-10/100

BJ-895PD/535PD/F890PD, PIXUS 50i/80i/450i/470PD

Not supported

PictBridge specifications

Not supported

PictBridge specifications

PictBridge specifications

PictBridge control
SET 101-0141 38/45 1280x960

PictBridge control
SET 101-0141 38/45 1280x960

PictBridge control
SET 101-0141 38/45 1280x960

When the printer is connected

Paper setting Paper size Paper type Borders/ no borders 8-of-1 screen layout Sectional printing Image optimizing Date printing Trimming (When using card paper)

Printing functions

( ) : When the printer is supported The model names of supported printers are all Japanese model names.

28

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


6-10 Other functions 6-10-1 Automatic stop function 6-10-2 Power automatic stop function 6-10-3 Copy between media 6-10-4 World clock display 6-10-5 Speaker 6-10-6 Battery charging function

Charging time 6-10-7 File transfer USB file transfer

When forward still image playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes, or reverse still image playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes. When the disc end or beginning is reached. When Recording Pause continues for approx. 5 minutes. When the battery voltage falls below a specified value. This function copies disc still images (JPEG compression) to a card or card still images (JPEG compression) to a disc. With still image all copy function. Set reference city (city of time clock setting) and select name of city when shooting. Date and time are automatically adjusted to local date and time, and recorded in data code. Built-in, volume adjustment provided When the Canon Compact Power Adapter CA-570 is connected, the battery pack installed in the battery pack compartment can be charged. (During charging, the charge lamp flashes [Charging level : One flash per second for a charge level of 0% to approximately 50%, two flashes per second for a charge level of 50% to 95%, and the lamp lights for a charge level of 95% or more]). BP-208: Approx. 165 minutes Still images recorded on memory cards and discs can be uploaded to a PC in the camcorder by connecting the included IFC-300PCU interface cable between a USB port on the PC and the USB port of the camcorder. Still images from a PC can be downloaded to memory cards in the camcorder. However, writing to the disc is not possible. Not possible If the zoom lever is flipped to the Tele side during still image playback from the card or disc, the image being played back can be enlarged up to 5 times its size (The initial setting of the playback zoom switch is 2 playback zoom, and this can be changed to 1 to 5 using the zoom lever). Playback zoom is cancelled by holding the zoom lever to the Wide side until the frame display no longer appears. Zoom not possible during movie playback. Position of the enlarged section during enlarged screen view can be changed by the cross key (On the LCD monitor, a frame is displayed to show the zoom-in area, and this frame can be moved using the four direction operations of the cross key).

6-10-8 Analog / Digital conversion 6-10-9 Playback zoom

6-10-10 PRINT/SHARE button

6-10-11 Built-in lithium battery

Supported. This button lights up when the camcorder is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer or PC (ZoomBrowser 4.6x or higher must be installed). The button can then be pressed to send print images on the printer or send images to the PC. When the supplied MyDVD for Canon software is installed (Windows XP only) and a 12 cm DVD (-R/-RW) black disc is loaded in the PC, this button turns on. Pressing the button enables burning of the 12 cm DVD in the PC (one-operation burning function). Discs in the DC10 E, DC20 E need to be finalized. The 12 cm DVDs on the PC side are also finalized. Built-in. When the battery is not used for about three months, the power may be discharged and the date and time settings will be lost. The date and time need to be reset after either connecting a power supply or installing batteries and charging. It takes approximately 24 hours for a full charge. None Multi 10-pin (AV, S), output only None None mini-B Receptacle, (USB 2.0 Hi-Speed class compliant) Special multi-pin Special 3-pin 3.4 mm jack

7 Terminals 7-1 DV terminal 7-2 Multi-pin 7-3 External microphone input terminal 7-4 Headphone terminal 7-5 USB terminal 7-6 Memory card terminal 7-7 Battery terminal 7-8 DC input terminal

29

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


8 Power supply 8-1 Input power supply 8-2 Power consumption DC10 E

7.4 V DC (battery pack), 8.4 V DC (DC IN) Shooting XP : Approx. 5.1 W, SP : Approx. 4.6 W, LP : Approx. 4.2 W (CVF) XP : Approx. 5.2 W, SP : Approx. 4.7 W, LP : Approx. 4.3 W (LCD Normal) XP : Approx. 5.3 W, SP : Approx. 4.8 W, LP : Approx. 4.4 W (LCD Bright) XP : Approx. 4.6 W, SP : Approx. 4.2 W, LP : Approx. 3.8 W (LCD Normal) XP : Approx. 5.8 W, SP : Approx. 5.3 W, LP : Approx. 4.8 W (CVF) XP : Approx. 5.9 W, SP : Approx. 5.4 W, LP : Approx. 4.9 W (LCD Normal) XP : Approx. 6.0 W, SP : Approx. 5.5 W, LP : Approx. 5.1 W (LCD Bright) XP : Approx. 4.9 W, SP : Approx. 4.4 W, LP : Approx. 4.1 W (LCD Normal) * The power consumption during recording shows the data during recording and AF focusing. Approx. 48 86 122 mm (1.9 3.4 4.8 in.) (Not including maximum protrusions) Approx. 415 g (14.6 lb) Approx. 465 g ( 1.0 lb) (Including BP-208, DVD disc, and memory card)

DC20 E

Playing Shooting

Playing 9 Dimensions (W H D) 10 Weight 10-1 Main unit 10-2 Total equipped weight

11 Temperature and humidity requirements 11-1 Temperature and humidity requirements for performance 0 to 40C, 85% (relative humidity) 11-2 Temperature and humidity requirements for operation 5 to 45C, 65% (relative humidity)

30

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


12 Relationship between DC10 E, DC20 E functions and modes
*:Initial setting Backup is performed (not cancelled when power is shut off). Except when card simultaneous recording is OFF. Cannot be set when card simultaneous recording is OFF. And backup is performed. Effect function is black and white. Settings can be changed, but operation is single shot. : Cannot be set Settings can be changed, but operations are disabled. Backup is performed. Enabled when card simultaneous recording is ON. Settings can be made when card simultaneous recording is OFF, but operation is disabled. Backup is performed. Conditional backup is performed. Settings can be made when AF and Focus Priority is ON. Backup is performed.
Disc Still Image
SCN P

AUTO
Portrait Large Recording pixels Medium Small Super Fine Compression ratio Fine Normal Simultaneous recording 640 x 480 OFF Fine Normal Auto Always On Flash (DC20 E only) OFF Red-eye Reduction Single shooting Drive mode Continuous shooting High-speed continuous shooting AEB Night Night Mini video OFF light (DC20 E only) ON ON Digital Zoom OFF AUTO Sun Shade White balance Cloudy Tungsten Fluorescent H Fluorescent MANUAL OFF Vivid Neutral Color effects Low Sharpening Soft Skin Detail Custom Evaluative metering Metering system Center weighted average metering Spot metering (Center or AF frame continuous) AF MF MF infinity AiAF Center fixed AF AF auxiliary light AUTO (DC20 E only) AF auxiliary light OFF (DC20 E only) Focus Priority ON Focus Priority OFF Fader Digital Effects Effects Multi-screen Card MIX Photo stitch OFF ON EXP lock Sports Night Snow Beach Sunset Spotlight Fireworks P Tv Av

31

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


Card Still Image
SCN P

AUTO
Portrait Large Recording pixels Medium Small Super Fine Compression ratio Fine Normal Simultaneous recording 640 x 480 OFF Fine Normal Auto Always On Flash (DC20 E only) OFF Red-eye Reduction Single shooting Drive mode Continuous shooting High-speed continuous shooting AEB Night Night Mini video OFF light (DC20 E only) ON Digital Zoom ON OFF AUTO Sun Shade White balance Cloudy Tungsten Fluorescent H Fluorescent MANUAL OFF Vivid Neutral Color effects Low Sharpening Soft Skin Detail Custom Evaluative metering Metering system Center weighted average metering Spot metering (Center or AF frame continuous) AF MF MF infinity AiAF Center fixed AF AF auxiliary light AUTO (DC20 E only) AF auxiliary light OFF (DC20 E only) Focus Priority ON Focus Priority OFF Fader Digital Effects Effects Multi-screen Card MIX Photo stitch OFF ON EXP lock Sports Night Snow Beach Sunset Spotlight Fireworks P Tv Av

32

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


Disc Movie

(DC20 E only)

(DC20 E only) ON OFF Metering (DC20 E only) (DC20 E only)

33

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT


Disc Movie

(DC20 E only)

(DC20 E only) ON OFF (DC20 E only) (DC20 E only)

34

DC10 E, DC20 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

4. System Diagram (Common to all Models)

WS-20 Wrist Strap

Shoulder Strap

CG-300E Battery Charger

BP-208 Battery Pack

Mini DVD Disc DVD-R/RW

CA-570 Compact Power Adapter

WL-D86 Wireless Controller

BP-208 Battery Pack

WD-H27 Wide-converter

MTC-100 Multi Cable

PC-A10 SCART Adapter

TV

VCR TL-H27 Tele-converter IFC-300PCU USB Cable Card Adapter miniSD Card FS-H27U Filter Set Reader/Writer DVD Drive Computer

Mini DVD Disc DVD-R/RW

DVD player/ recorder

SC-2000 Soft Carrying Case

PictBridge-compliant printers

Fig. 4

35

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTON
CONTENTS
1. PCB Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 2. Power Supply Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 2-1 Startup of Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 2-2 Power Fuses ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 2-3 Power Supply Circuits ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 3. Built-in Charger Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 3-2 Operation at Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 3-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8 3-2-2 Progress of Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 4. Signal Processing Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10 4-1-1 DC10 E Outline of Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-1-2 DC10 E Outline of Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing (DC10 E) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 4-3 Camera/Card Signal Processing (DC20 E) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 4-3-1 2-Megapixel Camera System ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 4-3-2 Camera Motion Picture Recording --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 4-3-3 Card Still Picture Recording ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15 4-4 Recorder Signal Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 4-5 Audio Signal Flow --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 5. System Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 5-1 Outline of System Control ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18 5-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 5-3 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 6. Disk functions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 6-1 Playlist editing Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 6-2 Still Image Shooting and Direct Print ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

1. PCB Functions
(1) MAIN PCB System-Control Section IC100 IC101 IC103 IC104 IC105 IC106 IC810 SUB MI-COM CCM MI-COM FLASH 3.2V REGULATOR RESET IC AND GATE AUDIO PLL Low-voltage system control (POWER KEY detection, memory backup, internal clock, charging) System control (Camera/Card/Mode) Flash-ROM for CCM MI-COM (8Mbit) Power source for the SUB MI-COM and rechargeable power source for the lithium battery SUB MI-COM resetting Ready signal for serial communication between CCM MI-COM and LAP and DIGIC DV. Master clock signal generation, audio signal output

Camera/Card Section IC1000 (DC20 E) CDS/AD IC1001 (DC10 E) INVERTER IC1001 (DC20 E) TG IC1002 (DC10 E) TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER IC1002 (DC20 E) MPX2 IC1004 (DC10 E) 2.8V REGULATOR IC1101 IC1102 IC1103 IC1200 IC1400 IC1401 SDRAM SDRAM DIGIC DV LENS DRIVER LAP Lens actuator processor 1.8V REGULATOR 2ch CCD output signal sampling, A/D converter Oscillation circuit inverter CCD horizontal transfer pulse generation 2ch CCD output signal sampling, A/D converter, CCD horizontal transfer pulse generation AGC, image composition, flaw correction 2.8V regulator Memory for DIGIC DV (64Mbit) Memory for DIGIC DV (64Mbit) Camera digital signal processing, card image processing Zoom, focus motor driver, IRIS driver, and gyro output amp 1.8V regulator Shock sensor Shock sensor IC 75 Video driver DVD signal processing LSI, FRONT END control (ATAPI), BACK END MI-COM, LCD/CVF control DVD control, DVD management data, DVD backup (16Mbit) Buffer for SRAM-CS Flash-ROM for BACK END MI-COM (64Mbit) Memory for BACK END (CODEC) (128Mbit) Memory for BACK END (CODEC) (128Mbit) Memory for BACK END (ATAPI Communication) (512Mbit)

Shock Proof section IC1650 SHOCK SENSOR IC1651 IC2102 SENSOR IC 75OHM DRIVER

BACK END section IC2300 BACK END IC2301 IC2302 IC2303 IC2304 IC2305 IC2306 PM section SRAM BUFFER FLASH DDR SDRAM DDR SDRAM DDR SDRAM

IC3200 (DC20 E) 3.1V REGULATOR IC3201 IC3203 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL 4.6V REGULATOR

3.1V regulator Power PWM regulator controller 4.6V regulator

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION USB section IC3500 (2) SUB PCB IC1501 IC1502 IC801 CVF DRIVER 2.8V REGULATOR AIF4 CVF signal processing and drive 2.8V regulator Analog input/output signal processing, speaker amplifier

USB IC

USB I/F

(3) CCD PCB IC1050 (DC20 E) INVERTER IC1051 (DC20 E) INVERTER IC1052 (DC20 E) INVERTER IC1053 (DC20 E) INVERTER IC1054 (DC20 E) CCD IC1055 (DC20 E) OPE AMP IC1070 (DC10 E) CCD IC1071 (DC10 E) BUFFER IC1072 (DC10 E) BUFFER (4) LCD PCB IC901 IC902 IC903 (5) GYRO PCB IC1603 IC1604 EEPROM LCD DRIVER 2.8V REGULATOR

CCD horizontal transfer pulse inverter CCD horizontal transfer pulse inverter CCD horizontal transfer pulse inverter CCD horizontal transfer pulse inverter CCD image sensor CCD output amp CCD image sensor CCD horizontal transfer pulse buffer CCD horizontal transfer pulse buffer

EEPROM for LCD data LCD signal processing and drive 2.8V regulator

P SENSOR GYRO Y SENSOR GYRO

Pitch-direction angular speed detection YAW-direction angular speed detection

(6) FLASH PCB (DC20 E only) IC501 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL (7) CVF PCB

Control for main capacitor charging

Signal transfer from the SUB PCB to the CVF, CVF Backlight LED (8) DC JACK PCB DC JACK (9) CARD PCB Memory card slot, lithium secondary battery (10) AV FPC Multi JACK (11) USB FPC USB JACK (12) TS MACH FRONT END (Pickup, spindle, control PCB)

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2. Power Supply Circuit


2-1 Startup of Power Supply

SWITCH FPC ASS'Y


SW13 OPEN DETECT SW SW12 OPEN DETECT SW SW10 EJECT SW

IC2300 BACK END MI-COM.


V27

IC1103 DIGIC DV

DC JACK FPC
DC JACK +

MAIN PCB
CN3200 2,3 4,5

CN102

IC101 CCM MI-COM.


SERIAL DATA 20 EJECT SW 4 VCC

IC104 3.2V REGULATOR

RIGHT COVER
BATTERY TERMINAL + 13 DC V DET CN100 A15,B9-15 B1-B8 CN104 A15,B9-15 B1-B8 2

IC105 RESET

8 RESET

IC100 SUB MI-COM.

RESET SW

41 VTR ON 23 E3 DET

TS MECH

48

48

VTR 33 POW SW CAM 32 POW SW

VCC

IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

36 E3V 51

CN105 1 CN50 17 LITHUM BATTERY (2ND)

11 12

POWER SW

CARD PCB

ZOOM ASS'Y

Fig. 1

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Backup Lithium Battery 2.5V power from the lithium secondary battery is supplied to the SUB MI-COM. Thus, the SUB MI-COM performs data backup and clock operation when the main power supply is not connected.

Charging time (from empty state) 17.5 h 24 h 43 h

Charging capacity 70% 80% 100%

Backup period 2.7 months 3.1 months 3.9 months

Main Power Supply Main power (DC JACK/BATTERY) is supplied to IC3201 (DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL). Through the internal regulator in the IC3201, the main power thus supplied is converted 3V power, which is output as E3V from pin 51 of the IC3201. On output of the E3V power, the SUB MI-COM recognizes that the main power supply has been connected, and then performs initialization and is brought into the standby status. Then, the SUB MI-COM carries out initialization and sets up the standby state. In this state, the SUB MI-COM performs detection of startup-related switches. When it detects that any one of the startup-related switches has been turned on, the VTR ON (H) signal is output form pin 41. Upon output of the VTR ON (H) signal, power to each circuit is turned on. When power is fed from the main power supply, 3.2V power is output from pin 4 of the IC104. Instead of power from the lithium secondary battery, the 3.2V power output from pin 4 of the IC104 is supplied to the SUB MI-COM. This 3.2V power is also used for recharging the lithium secondary battery. Shown below is the relationship between the charging time and the charging capacity: * The values indicated below are for reference only. The actual values will vary depending on the operating environment.

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2-2 Power Fuses

MAIN PCB
CN100 BATT. TERNINAL BATT + CN104 BATT. + FU3201 FU3202 1.2V, 3.3V CN3200 DC JACK CN3200 DC + FU3203 FRONT END UNREG FU3204 5V, VTR UNREG, CCD, LCD FRONT END UNREG FU1800 CHARGE UNREG FU3200 ST UNREG 4V, 2.7V, 2.5V DC/DC CONVERTOR

RIGHT COVER

DC JACK PCB
FU3205

Fig. 2 The power supply from the battery DC JACK is supplied to seven fuses on the MAIN PCB, through which the following seven power voltage are delivered. (1) ST UNREG : FU3200 Main capacitor charging power source for flash memory (DC20 E only) (2) 1.4V + 2.7V + 2.5V + DC/DC : FU3201 1.4V power source (MACS1.4V, DVDD1.4V, AVDD1.4V) 2.7V power source (CAM2.7V [DC20 E only], DVDD2.7V, PLL2.7V, AVDD2.7V, AA2.7V, HTG2.7V [DC20 E only]) 2.5V power source (DVDD2.5V, DDR2.5V, SDRAM2.5V) DC/DC CONVERTER power source (3) 1.2V + 3.3V : FU3202 1.2V power source (PRISM1.2V) 3.3V power source (LCD3.3V, USB3.3V, FLASH SRAM3.3V, DVDD3.3V, AVDD3.3V) CCD drive IC power source (DC10 E:CAM3.3V, DC20 E:CAM3.5V) (4) FRONT END UNREG : FU3203 FRONT END power source (5) 5V + VTR UNREG + CCD + LCD : FU3204 5V power source (P5V, LCD5V, AA4.7V) VTR UNREG CCD drive power source (CCD15V, CCD-7V) LCD drive power source (LCD8.5V, BL POW) (6) FRONT END UNREG : FU3205 FRONT END power source (7) CHARGE UNREG : FU1800 Battery Charge circuit power source

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2-3 Power Supply Circuits


Figure 3 shows the power supply circuits. The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the VTR ON signals output from the SUB MI-COM.

MAIN PCB
UNREG 48

VCC2

REG.

51 23

E3V

UNREG PWM CH-1 20 UNREG PWM CH-2 70 71 REG. Q3201 Q3211 DC20 E ONLY DC10 E ONLY 20 UNREG PWM 72 REG. Q3204 REG. IC3200 LPF 62 63 REG. Q3203 Q3205 DVDD 1.4V MACS 1.4V AVDD 1.4V CAM 3.5V CAM 3.3V LCD 3.3V USB 3.3V FLASH SRAM 3.3V DVDD 3.3V 15 UNREG PWM CH-4 14 UNREG PWM CH-5 76 REG. Q3202 DC20 E ONLY 11 UNREG 73 REG. Q3213 REG. IC3203 LPF LPF AVDD 3.3V LCD 5V P 5V AA 4.7V AA 2.7V AVDD 2.7V DVDD 2.7V LPF LPF HTG 2.7V CAM 2.7V LPF PRISM 1.2V

IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

CH-3

CAM ON From CCM MI-COM. CONTROL Q1001, Q1002 CCD 1 5V LCD 8.5V CCD -7V CCD VL ON From CCM MI-COM.

LCD BL VFB From LCD PCB PANEL BL CTRL (LUMINANCE CONTROL) From LENS DRIVER VTR ON From SUB MI-COM.

4 3 PWM CH-6 Q3207, T3201 32 CLT 33 CLT3.4 34 CLT5 35 CLT6 36 CLT7 PWM CH-7 6 ON/ OFF CONTROL PWM CH-8 78 REG. Q3200 L3213 78 REG. Q3206 10 UNREG 77 REG.

Q1003, Q1004 CONTROL

DDR 2.5V DVDD 2.5V SDRAM 2.5V

LCD BL ON From BACK END Q1801 Q1803

37 CLT8 UNREG

LCD BL POW

Fig. 3

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3. Built-in Charger Circuit

BATTERY
+ B+ D THERMISTOR

BATT. TERMINAL BATT + BATT INFO B+ BATT INFO D BATT TEMP BATT

CN100 BATT+ BATT INFO B+ BATT INFO D BATT TEMP A15,B9-15

A14
A13

A12

RIGHT COVER

UNREG. CN3200 DC JACK + DETECT

PM SECTION

2,3 4,5 1

CN3200 DC + DC DETECT

DC JACK PCB

CN104 BATT TEMP BATT INFO D BATT INFO B+ BATT+ FU1800 Q1802 31 BATT INFO D 27 BATT TEMP 13 DC V DET 12 DC J DET 34 E3V 62 VCC 65 OUTPUT DRIVE 61 60 29 A/D V 28 A/D I 38 INIT CHARGE1 E3V 51 59 39 CHARGE Q1803

A12
A13

A14
A15,B9-15

IC100 SUB MI-COM

IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL


CONTROL 64 63

OSC 29 28

Q1801

MAIN PCB
Fig. 4

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3-1 Outline
The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows. (1) IC100 (SUB MI-COM) Control of IC3201 Error discrimination and display Detection and display of charging progress Detection of DC JACK connection and voltage Detection of internal battery temperature (2) IC3201 (DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL) Charging voltage/current control

3-2 Operation at Charging


3-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging
When the following conditions are satisfied, the SUB MI-COM (IC100) controls the IC3201 and starts charging. If the conditions shown in (4) and (5) above are not satisfied or if the type in (6) could not be confirmed, a charge error is indicated. Conditions 1 2 3 4 5 6 Main unit power is turned OFF DC jack is connected. Power supplied from DC jack UNREG voltage is 8.4 0.3 V. Battery temperature is within the range of -6.8C to 49.3C. Confirmation of the type of the battery connected Detection SUB MI-COM SUB MI-COM pin 12 DC J DET SUB MI-COM pin 13 DC V DET SUB MI-COM pin 26 BATT.A/D SUB MI-COM pin 27 BATT.TEMP SUB MI-COM pin 31 BATT.INFO D Source of detection DC JACK DC IN UNREG. Battery T terminal Battery D terminal

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3-2-2 Progress of Charging


The IC3201 starts a trickle charge under control of the SUB MI-COM (IC100). The trickle charge continues until the battery voltage reaches 6.17V. At the point when 6.17V is reached, the IC1800 starts a 808 mA quick charge. Then, the charge current decreases gradually with the progress of charging (because of an increase in impedance of the battery). When the charge current becomes 70 mA or less, the end-of-charging indication is provided. Thereafter, supplementary charging is performed for 90 minutes at maximum until the charge current becomes 34 mA or less.

Charging current

LED flashes once Quick charge 808mA When battery voltage reaches 6.17V, quick charge starts.

LED flashes twice

LED lights up steadily

480mA

An error is indicated if the battery voltage becomes 5.5V or lower during quick charging or constant-voltage charging. An error is indicated if the battery temperature is not within the range of 10 C to 52.5 C. Trickle 81mA When the battery voltage reaches 5.2 V, the trickle timer (2) is started. Trickle1 Trickle2 Quick charge timer Timeout timer timer error 6min. max Timeout error 10min. max Timeout error 90min.max 2-flash Full charge timer indication at timeout 258min.max 70mA

34mA Supplementary charge timer Elapsed time

90min.max

Total timer 336min.max

Full charge indication at timeout

Fig. 5

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4. Signal Processing Circuit


4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit
4-1-1 DC10 E Outline of Signal Processing Circuit
Figure 6 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.

LENS

IC1070 CCD

CCD PCB

IC1002 TG/CDS/AGC /AD/V-DRIVER

MEMORY CARD

CARD PCB

IC1101 SDRAM IC1102 SDRAM IC1103 DIGIC DV

IC810 AUDIO PLL

IC801 AIF4 IC1501 CVF DRIVER

SPEAKER

MIC

SUB PCB
CVF LCD

CVF PCB LCD PCB

IC3500 USB IC

IC902 LCD DRIVER IC2300 BACK END IC2304 DDR SDRAM IC2305 DDR SDRAM

LCD

IC2102 75 DRIVER

Y C

MAIN PCB USB FPC


DVD USB TERMINAL FRONT END (DVD DRIVE)

AV FPC
AV JACK

Fig. 6

10

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-1-2 DC10 E Outline of Signal Processing Circuit


Figure 7 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.

LENS

IC1054 CCD

CCD PCB

IC1001 TG

IC1000 CDS/AD

IC1002 MPX2

MEMORY CARD

CARD PCB

IC1101 SDRAM IC1102 SDRAM IC1103 DIGIC DV

IC810 AUDIO PLL

IC801 AIF4 IC1501 CVF DRIVER

SPEAKER

MIC

SUB PCB
CVF LCD

CVF PCB LCD PCB

IC3500 USB IC

IC902 LCD DRIVER IC2300 BACK END IC2304 DDR SDRAM IC2305 DDR SDRAM

LCD

IC2102 75 DRIVER

Y C

MAIN PCB USB FPC


DVD USB TERMINAL FRONT END (DVD DRIVE)

AV FPC
AV JACK

Fig. 7

11

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing (DC10 E)


4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording

64 Mbit SDRAM IC1101 32 bit

64 Mbit SDRAM IC1102 32 bit

SDRAM IF
CDS/ AGC/ AD/ TG/ V-DRIVER IC1002
Deformation, Drawing REND

CCM MI-COM IC101 BACK END IC2300

CCD IC1070
36MHz

proc

resize

nr

Synthesis COMP

12bit 36MHz

Camera signal processing GRAB Audio IC1103 DIGIC DV

JPEG JPEG

CARD IF

Fig. 8

4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording

64 Mbit SDRAM IC1101 32 bit

64 Mbit SDRAM IC1102 32 bit

SDRAM IF
RAW YCC 1 YCC 2

DMA

CCM MI-COM IC101


Synthesis COMP

CCD IC1070
36MHz

CDS/ AGC/ AD/ TG/ V-DRIVER IC1002

proc

resize

nr

Deformation, Drawing REND

FRONT END IC2300 MEMORY CARD

12bit 36MHz

Camera signal processing GRAB

JPEG

CARD IF

Audio IC1103 DIGIC DV

Fig. 9

12

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION <CCD> IC1070 1/4-inch interlaced CCD Complementary color filter Total number of pixels : Approx. 1,330,000 Effective number of pixels : Tape : Approx. 690,000 : Tape : Approx. 1,230,000 <CDS/AGC/AD/TG/V-DRIVER> IC1002 A signal read out of the CCD is extracted. Then, after the extracted signal is subjected to AGC processing and A/D conversion, it is output as a digital signal. <DIGIC DV> IC1103 This circuit carries out various camera signal processing operations (EIS, AWB, etc.) and digital effect processing. It also performs multimedia-application signal processing mainly for still image recording. Feature engine High-speed card interface JPEG method compression/extension Audio data compression (ADPCM) USB function <SDRAM> IC1101, IC1102 Field memory for camera signal processing and digital effect processing Image data memory for Memory card write/read operation

13

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-3 Camera/Card Signal Processing (DC20 E)


4-3-1 2-Megapixel Camera System

IC1054 CCD

: Analog Signal : Digital Signal

IC1000 CDS/AD CDS AD

IC1002 MPX

36MHz 2ch

CDS

AD
14bit 36MHz

Image adjustment, picture composition

Missing pixel compensation

IC1103 DIGIC DV
12bit 72MHz

IC1001 TG

Fig. 10 This model handles the increased CCD picture element readout by splitting the CCD into right and left halves and having two circuit systems for readout, as shown illustrated above. The two systems of video signal are distinctly subjected to A/D conversion, are composed into a single image by MPX-IC, and are sent to DIGIC DV for camera signal processing.

4-3-2 Camera Motion Picture Recording

64 Mbit SDRAM IC1101 CCD IC1054


36MHz 2ch

64 Mbit SDRAM IC1102 32 bit

32 bit

SDRAM IF
Deformation, Drawing REND

CDS/AD IC1000
36MHz 14bit

MPX IC1002
72MHz 12bit

proc

resize

nr

Synthesis COMP

BACK END IC2300

Camera signal processing GRAB

JPEG JPEG

CARD IF IC101 CCM MI-COM USB

AIF4 IC801

Audio IC1103 DIGIC DV

Fig. 11

14

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-3-3 Card Still Picture Recording

64 Mbit SDRAM IC1101 CCD IC1054


36MHz 2ch

64 Mbit SDRAM IC1102 32 bit DMA CCM MI-COM IC101


Synthesis COMP

32 bit

SDRAM IF
RAW YCC 1 YCC 2

CDS/AD IC1000
36MHz 14bit

MPX IC1002
72MHz 12bit

proc

resize

nr

Deformation, Drawing REND

BACK END IC2300

Camera signal processing GRAB

JPEG

CARD IF

Audio IC1103 DIGIC DV USB MEMORY CARD

Fig. 12 <CCD> IC1054 / CCD PCB 1/3.9-inch interlaced CCD RGB primary color filter Total number of pixels : Approx. 2,200,000 Effective number of pixels : Approx. 1,230,000 for tape recording : Approx. 2,000,000 for card recording <CDS/AD> IC1000 / MAIN PCB Extracts signals read through 2 left and right channels from CCD, eliminates noise components, performs A/D conversion, and then outputs digital signal through 2 channels. <MPX2> IC1002 Composes picture data input through 2 left and right channels, and corrects the offsets. Then performs AGC processing, corrects CCD missing pixels, and outputs the signal through 1 channel. <DIGIC DV> IC1102 Performs different camera signal processing (EIS, AWB, etc.) and digital effect processing. Also performs signal processing for coping with multimedia centered on still picture shooting. Feature engine High-speed card interface JPEG method compression/extension Audio data compression (ADPCM) USB function <SDRAM> IC1101/1102 Memory for DIGIC DV

15

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-4 Recorder Signal Processing

IC2306 DDR SDRAM 108MHz IC1103 DIGIC DV A DATA

DVD ATAPI

FRONT END (DVD DRIVE)

135MHz IC2300 BACK END

IC2304 DDR SDRAM IC2305 DDR SDRAM

MI-COM

C IC3500 USB IC USB TERMINAL AV JACK

IC2102 75 DRIVER

Fig. 13 < BACK END >IC2300 The DVD coding circuit and MI-COM circuit are integrated in a single chip. Video/audio data is coded through use of the IC2304 and 2305 (DDR SDRAM). The internal MI-COM circuit carries out front-end (DVD drive) control. The recorded signals to DVD (read-out) are handled by the front end through ATAPI communication for which the IC2306 (DDR SDRAM) is mainly used. < FRONT END>DVD DRIVE At the time of recording, video/audio data fed from the back end is modulated to DVD recording data, and a DVD write control operation is performed. At the time of playback, data is read out from DVD, and demodulation is performed together with error correction.

16

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-5 Audio Signal Flow

MIC

IC1103 DIGIC DV
MEM IF

IC810 AUDIO PLL

IC2300 BACK END

FRONT END
DVD

HEAD PHONE AV JACK

L R L R

IC801 AIF4

SDRAM Serial Control

SPEAKER DRIVER

B EEP

IC101 CCM MI-COM.

SPEAKER

Fig. 14 < AIF >IC801 Out ALC (Auto Level Control), fading, and amplification of various output signals. For the beep tone issued at ejection, etc., the signal from the CCM MI-COM is generated in the circuit and changed over in the AIF. The microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A, and digital I/F, SPEAKER DRIVER with ALC circuits are contained in this IC. It is also used for changeover between ordinary voice sounds and beep sounds. < BACK END > At the time of recording, audio digital signals are compressed into a Dolby AC-3 form. At the time of playback, demodulation processing is performed for inversion.

17

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5. System Control
5-1 Outline of System Control
System control is performed by the CCM MI-COM (IC101), BACK END MI-COM, and SUB MI-COM on MAIN PCB.

LENS

FRONT FPC
REMOTE CONTROL SIGNAL RECEIVER

MOTOR DRIVE

IRIS DRIVE

IC1200 LENS DRIVER IC1103 DIGIC DV

MAIN PCB

ZOOM ASS'Y
ZOOM SW PHOTO SW START/STOP SW POWER SW

IC1400 LAP

IC1001 TG

IC1000 CDS/AD

IC1002 MPX2

SUB PCB
IC103 FLASH ROM IC3500 USB IC IC101 CCM MI-COM IC2301 S RAM IC2303 FLASH ROM IC801 AIF4

IC1501 CVF DRIVER

R COVER
R-KEY BATT INFO BATT TEMP

AE FPC
MODE SW

IC100 SUB MI-COM

LCD PCB
MI-COM IC901 EEPROM

REAR KEY FPC


CROSS SW FUNC SW MENU SW E-DIRECT SW TAPE/CARD

IC2300 BACK END

IC902 LCD DRIVER

ATAPI

SW FPC
EJECT SW FRONT END

DISC COVER DET

Fig. 15

18

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM


(1) CCM MI-COM (IC101) The major functions of the CCM MI-COM are listed below. Key input Remote control input USB interface control (In Card mode) DIGIC DV control Card control CCD drive control AE, AF, AWB control EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control PRINTER control (2) SUB MI-COM (IC100) The major functions of the SUB MI-COM are listed below. Power ON/OFF control Built-in charge circuit control Built-in clock (3) MI-COM in BACK END (IC2300) The major functions of the MI-COM in BACK END are listed below. Front end (TS mech) control through ATAPI communication. USB interface control (In movie transmission) OSD (On Screen Display) Bitmap control LCD/EVF control

19

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5-3 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB)


Signal flow of Normal Signal flow of USB connection

IC1054 CCD

IC1000 CDS/AD

IC1101 IC1102 SDRAM

IC1002 MPX

Movie / Still Picture Signal Processing

IC1103 DIGIC DV
MEMORY CARD

CCM MI-COM

IC3500 USB IC

USB TERMINAL

BACK END Picture Processing

MI-COM.

IC2300 BACK END

FRONT END

Fig. 16

In the normal status, the video signals generated by the camera section are sent to the memory card via the DIGIC DV and also to the front end via the back end. For USB connection, the USB terminal is connected to the memory card through the USB IC and DIGIC DV in the still picture mode. In the movie mode, the USB terminal is connected to the front end through the USB IC and back end.

20

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

6. Disk functions
6-1 Playlist editing Functions
The DC10 E and DC20 E are equipped with disc-editing functions for making simple edits to original images and for editing playlists. Below is the conceptual diagram showing the playlist-editing functions for deleting, moving, dividing, and adding scenes. The playlist refers to a list prepared by selecting desired scenes from the original images (motion video). Only DVD-RW can be used (VR mode). Here, a scene refers to a single scene shot from the start of recording with a press of the record button to the stop of recording with the second press of the same button.

Scene (1)

Scene (2)

Scene (3)

Scene (n-1)

Scene (n)

Original image

Creating playlists (the original images remain unaffected)

Playlist Scene (1) Scene (3) Scene (4)

Delete Scene

Playlist Scene (1) Scene (3) Scene (4)

Move Scene

Playlist Scene (3) Scene (4) Scene (2)

Divide Scene

Add Scene

Playlist Scene (1) Scene (3) a Scene (3) b Scene (4)

Playlist Scene (1) Scene (3) Scene (4) Scene (7)

21

DC10 E, DC20 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

6-2 Still Image Shooting and Direct Print


The DC10 E and DC20 E have a function for recording still images on miniSD cards and DVD discs (both media are JPEG-compressed). It is possible to check the still images (JPEG-compressed) recorded by the DC10 E or DC20 E without finalizing the disc. If the images recorded on the disc are to be played back on another DVD player or the like, they must be finalized. To enable still images in addition to video to be played back on a DVD player or the like, the still images must be converted into an irreversible MPEG motion video that is called "Photo movie". Only by making such conversion can still images be played back on a DVD player or the like. The images are played back one after another at intervals of approx. 3 seconds in the form of a slideshow on a DVD player. If the still images are to be edited using the playlist editing (VR mode) function provided for the DC10 E/DC20 E, the still images (JPEG-compressed) must be converted into Photo movies. Even when the still images on the disc have been converted into Photo movies, they remain stored on the disc as JPEG-compressed images unless the original still images are erased. Using these still images, the DC10 E/DC20 E enables printout on a PictBridgecompliant printer. The DC10 E/DC20 E does not support non-PictBridge-compliant printers (with CP direct specification or Camera direct specification). The DC10 E/DC20 E is also capable of recording still images (JPEG-compressed) on both discs and cards (miniSD), and the same image size and quality are featured by both of these media. The DC10 E/DC20 E also features a function to copy images from discs to cards and vice versa. Thus, to play back images on a DVD player or perform playlist editing on the DC10 E/DC20 E the still images shot and stored on the cards, these still images on the card must be copied to a disc and then converted into Photo movies. Similarly, if DPOF-compliant printing is to be selected for the printing of the still images on the disc, the still images on the disc must be copied to the card and then processed. The diagram below shows the relationships between the still images on the discs and on the cards.

DC10 E, DC20 E PC Still images (JPEG-compressed) After finalization, play back on a DVD player. DVD player Copying of still images (JPEG-compressed) possible Disc Memory card Still images (JPEG-compressed) (Irreversible compression) Photo movie (MPEG)

Still images (JPEG-compressed) [DPOF supported]

PRINTER

Data transfer Printout on a printer

22

DISASSEMBLING
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 Notes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 Safety Precautions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 List of Supplies -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 1-2 Separation of R Upper Cover ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 1-3 Separation of R-LCD Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 1-4 Separation of Front Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 1-6 Separation of Flash PCB ASS'Y (DC20 E only) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 1-7 Separation of CVF Unit, SUB PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 1-8 Separation of GYRO PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15 1-9 Separation of Camera Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 16 1-10 Separation of Center Cover --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 1-11 Separation of Zoom Ass'y, CARD PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 1-12 Separation of MAIN PCB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 1-13 Separation of TS Mech Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 1-14 Separation of Main Frame ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23 1-15 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 1-16 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 1-17 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30 1-18 Disassembly of L Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 1-19 Disassembly of Lock Ass'y ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34 1-20 Separation of LCD Ass'y ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 1-21 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39 1-22 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 1-23 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Ass'y -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42 1-24 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43 1-25 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 45 1-26 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47 1-27 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49 1-28 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51 1-29 Disassembly of Camera Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52 1-30 Disassembly of Lens Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54 1-31 List of Screws Used ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 56 1-32 List of Disassembly Photos ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1. Disassembling and Reassembling


Notes (1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part. (2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure diagram and interconnection diagram for boards. Lateral engaging connector ( The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) : Contacts are positioned downward. (board side) : Contacts are positioned upward.
Metal contact (Pins face down)
:

Lengthwise engaging connector ( The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) Indicated by Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the shafts indicate the noncontacts.

Metal contact

Metal contact (Pins face up)


:

Metal contact

(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401C (CY9-8011-000). (4) If any part to be replaced has UL tape attached on it, be sure to reattach the UL tape at the same position when reassembling. (5) After detaching the REAR COVER, be sure to discharge the Main Capacitor. (Since a high voltage is applied to the Main Capacitor, take care not to receive electric shock or to shortcircuit other parts.) Safety Precautions (1) TS Mech safety The laser beam is emitted in the TS Mech Recorder Ass'y. If the laser beam gets in your eyes, it could cause eye damage, so never disassemble the TS Mech Recorder Ass'y. (2) Precautions for handling TS Mech This product's laser beam condenses light using an objective lens in the light pick up, so that it strikes a focal point on the disk's recording surface. Therefore, make sure that your eyes are at least 30 cm away from the objective lens when the laser diode is emitting light. Note : In complete products, the laser beam is not normally emitted when the Disc Cover is open. The laser beam is emitted when the two open/closed detection sensors near the Disc Cover are set to closed or when the Disc Cover on a disassembled product is closed and the operation of the TS Mech Recorder Ass'y is being checked. The laser diode wavelength of this product is from 652 to 662.5 nm, and the power consumption is below 1mW.

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING List of Supplies


Item Name Hanarl KS-39M T hree Bond 1401B Sponge (W H T : 300mm 200mm 6mm) Adhesive T ape, No.354E (W L T : 9mm 50m 0.15mm, UL type) Adhesive T ape, No. 501F (W L T : 10mm 50m 0.16mm, UL type) Kapton T ape (W L T : 9mm 20m 0.025mm) Sheet, Shield (W H : 250mm 250mm) Item Number DY9-3053-000 Lubrication CY9-8012-000 Adhesive DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration-isolating /sound-absorbing material DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape DY9-3034-000 General-purpose double-side-coated adhesive tape DY9-3052-000 General-purpose adhesive tape DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material Purpose Remarks Cover Screw

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart


(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart. (2) Reassemble by reversing the disassembly procedures.
START * DC20 E only : MAIN FLOW : SUB FLOW : MAIN UNIT 1-3 R-LCD Unit 1-20 Right Cover Ass'y

1-20 LCD Unit

1-21 LCD Hinge Ass'y

1-22 LCD PCB

1-22 LCD Panel 1-22 LCD Back Light Ass'y 1-4 Front Cover Unit 1-16 Mic Ass'y

1-16 FRONT FPC

1-16 MICROPHONE RELAY FPC 1-5 Rear Cover Unit

1-26 Jack Ass'y

1-26 USB FPC Ass'y

1-27 Rear Key FPC Ass'y

1-27 Speaker

1-6 Flash PCB Ass'y *

1-7 SUB PCB

1-7 CVF Unit

1-25 CVF LCD

1-25 CVF PCB

1-8 GYRO PCB

1-9 Camera Recorder Unit

1-9 Camera Unit

1-29 CCD Ass'y 1-30 Lens Unit

1-11 Zoom Ass'y

1-11 CARD PCB

1-11 L Cover Unit

1-18 Lock Ass'y 1-18 Disc Cover Ass'y

1-18 Flash Ass'y * 1-11 Recorder Unit

1-12 MAIN PCB 1-14 TS Mech Recorder Ass'y

END

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-2 Separation of R Upper Cover


(1) Connect to the External Power Source, and open the Disc Cover. Note1 : Never touch the Lens Section of TS Mech Recorder Ass'y. (2) Insert a clip or the like into the part B from the inside of the camera, disengage two claws C, and then detach the Center Cover Lid. Note2 : If the Disc Cover does not open because the fuse is blown or power is not supplied, break the Center Cover Lid to detach the R Upper Cover. When detaching it, be careful not to damage the surrounding covers. (3) Remove two screws (s 2). Remove five claws D, and detach the R Upper Cover. Note3 : When detaching the R Upper Cover, take care not to deform the claws part.

(2)

R Upper Cover (3) - s (3) - s Clip (1) Claws D Disc Cover (3) (1) Open the Disc Cover Open Knob External Power Source Jack Cover Note 1 Lens part Claws D Slide

(2)

Claws C

Center Cover Lid

s
2.5mm Metal M1.7

Fig. 1

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the R Upper Cover as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Center Cover Lid as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1)

R Upper Cover

Insert two claws D first.

Claws D

Note on Reassembling (2)

Center Cover Lid

Claws C

Insert claw C on the lower side first.

Fig. 2

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-3 Separation of R-LCD Unit


(1) Open the LCD, and remove eight screws (c 1, s 3, t 4). (2) Disconnect the CN104, the CN100 (B to B) , and the CN901, and detach the R-LCD Unit. Note : Take care not to damage the flexible cable. (3) Detach the Lid Bottom and the Bottom Radiative Rubber.

CN104 (B to B)

CN901

(2) CN100 (B to B) (2) (2)

(1) - s (1) - t

Bottom Radiative Rubber (3) Lid Bottom

(1) - c

(1) - s (1)

(1) - s

(1) - t

(1) - s

(1) - c

(1) - t

c
6mm Metal M1.7

s
2.5mm Metal M1.7

t
4.5mm Metal M1.7

Fig. 3

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the R-LCD Unit as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1) 1. Close the LCD and attach CN901. LCD 2. After attaching the CN901, open the LCD and attach it to the Main Unit. LCD Open R-LCD Unit

CN100 (B to B)

CN901

Hinge Ass'y Base Plate

R-LCD Unit

CN901

CN104 (B to B)

Front Cover

Insert between the bottom surface of R-LCD Unit and the Base Plate of Hinge Ass'y.

Fig. 4

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-4 Separation of Front Cover Unit


(1) Remove two screws (a 1, u 1), and disconnect the CN106 and the CN701. (2) Disengage two claws A, and detach the Front Cover Unit and the Front Sponge. (3) Detach the Lens Ring.

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

u
3mm Metal M1.7

Claws A

Front Cover Unit

Lens Ring

CN106 CN701 (3) (1) - u

(2) (1) - a

(2) (1)

Front Sponge (1)

Fig. 5

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Lens Ring as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Front Cover Unit as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Front Sponge as shown in the figure below. (4) Treat the flexible part as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1) Engage

Note on Reassembling (2) The openings should not be covered.

Front Sponge

Lens Ring

Fold at the center Note on Reassembling (3)

Claws A Adjust at the Lens Section and insert two claws A while turning them in the arrow direction. Note on Reassembling (4)

Insert

Insert the flexible cable to the depth of the Lens Holder and MAIN PCB.

Lens Holder CN106 CN701 SUB PCB Preliminarily fold up the flexible cable to fit it to the step difference between the SUB PCB and the MAIN PCB.

Be careful not to place it onto the IC2300.

MAIN PCB IC2300


Fig. 6

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit


(1) Open the SD Memory Cover, and remove four screws (v 4). (2) Remove the CN801 and the CN3501 to ensure that Rear Cover Unit is pulled up. (3) Disconnect the CN108, the CN3200, and detach the Rear Cover Unit.

v
3.5mm Metal M1.7

(1) - v

SUB PCB CN801

CN801

(1) - v

CN3501 (3) (2)

(2)

(3) CN108 (3) CN3200

(1) - v

SD Memory Cover

(1) - v

SUB PCB

CN108

MAIN PCB

Fig. 7

10

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Rear Cover Unit as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1)

Insert it downward. Rear Cover Unit

CVF L Cover Plate of Zoom Ass'y

Insert

Rear Cover Insert in between

Open the SD Memory Cover in advance.

Fig. 8

11

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-6 Separation of Flash PCB ASS'Y (DC20 E only)


Note : After separating the Rear Cover Unit, be sure to discharge the Main Capacitor. (A high voltage is present on the circuit. Be careful not to receive electric shock or cause accidental contact with other parts.) (1) Peel off the UL Tape. Remove two screws (a 2), disconnect the CN500, the CN501, and the CN502, and then detach the Flash PCB Ass'y. (2) Disengage three claws A and two claws B, and unsolder part (two points) and part (two points) , and detach the FLASH PCB, the Flash PCB Holder, the Capacitor PCB, the Main Capacitor, and the Condenser Wire.

CN502 CN501 CN500 (1) - a (1) (1)

(1)

UL Tape (9 20mm)

Flash PCB Ass'y (1) - a (2)

Solder FLASH PCB Flash PCB Holder Claws A (2) Claw A

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

Condenser Wire (Black)

Condenser Wire + (Red) Claws B

Note

Discharge point

FLASH PCB Main Capacitor

Solder (2) (2)

CAPACITOR PCB

Discharge resistance : Approx.1KSW

Main Capacitor

Fig. 9

12

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Main Capacitor, the Condenser Wire, and the Flash PCB Holder as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the FLASH PCB and the Condenser Wire as shown in the figure below. (3) Treat the Condenser Wire as shown in the figure below. (4) Attach the Flash PCB Ass'y with its dowels aligned. (5) Attach the FLASH FPC, the Condenser Wire, the Flash Cable, and the UL Tape as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1) Solder ([+] terminal) Condenser Wire + (Red) Condenser Wire (Black) Solder the Capacitor and Condenser wire to the Condenser PCB. Be careful about the polarity of the Capacitor and Condenser Wires at the soldered section .

CAPACITOR PCB

Solder ([] terminal)

Claws

Push into the Claws.

Insert into the hole. Flash PCB Holder Insert into the Flash PCB Holder. FLASH PCB

Main Capacitor (White line side on cylinder is negative []) Solder ([] terminal) Solder ([+] terminal) 1.Insert under the rib. Claws

Note on Reassembling (2)

Note on Reassembling (3)

Condenser Wire 2.Push into the Claws.

Condenser Wire + (Red) Condenser Wire (Black) Note on Reassembling (4) Flash PCB Ass'y

Dowel

Solder the Condenser Wire to the Flash PCB Ass'y and insert it to the Flash PCB Holder. Be careful about the polarity of the Condernser wire at the soldered section .

Flash PCB Holder

Dowel UL Tape (9 20mm)

Note on Reassembling (5) Lens Holder ST Wire Protector

FLASH FPC Flash Cable

Condenser Wire Insert the FLASH FPC so that it wraps the Flash Cable and Condenser Wire. Be sure to stick UL Tape so that it covers the discharge pad. And fix Flash Cable at the same time.

Attachment reference Flash Cable Take care not to extend onto the Lens Holder. CN500 Attachment reference
Fig. 10

Discharge pad

13

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-7 Separation of CVF Unit, SUB PCB


(1) Remove one screw (a 1), disconnect the CN1501, and demount the CVF Unit. (2) Remove one screw (a 1), disconnect the CN2901 and the CN2905 (B to B), and detach the SUB PCB. (3) Detach the SUB PCB Form. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the SUB PCB Form to the position indicated in the figure below.

CVF Unit (1)

(1) - a CN1501 CN2901 (B to B)

(2) - a

(1)

(2)

(3) SUB PCB CN2905 (B to B) SUB PCB Form

Note on Reassembling (1)

Attachment reference

SUB PCB Form

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

Attachment reference

Fig. 11

14

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-8 Separation of GYRO PCB


(1) Remove one screw (a 1), and detach the GYRO GND Plate. (2) Remove two screws (a 2), disconnect the CN1601, and detach the GYRO PCB Section. (3) Remove two screws (a 2), and detach the GYRO PCB. (4) Detach the CCD Connector Sheet from the GYRO Holder. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the CCD Connector Sheet as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the GYRO PCB Section as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1) GYRO Holder

CCD Connecter Sheet

Attachment reference Bend it and stick it so that the face and the back have the same length. GYRO GND Plate (2) - a

(1) - a

(1)

(2)

(2) CN1601

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

(2) - a GYRO PCB Section

Note on Reassembling (2)

(3) - a GYRO PCB CCD FPC (3) GYRO PCB GYRO Holder GYRO Holder (4) Insert the CCD FPC between the GYRO PCB and the GYRO Holder.
Fig. 12

CCD Connecter Sheet

15

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-9 Separation of Camera Unit


(1) Remove the CN1000 and the CN1052 (CN1070 for DC10 E) (B to B), the CN1200, and two screws (a 2) , and detach the Lens Unit. Note : Take care not to deform the CCD GND Plate. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Treat the Lens FPC and the Flash Cable as shown in the figure below.

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

CN1200 CN1000 (B to B)

Flash Cable

Lens Unit (1) - a (1)

(1)

(1) - a

CN1052 (DC20 E) CN1070 (DC10 E) (B to B) Note on Reassembling (1) Flash Cable

Note CCD GND Plate

ST Wire Protector

Fold up the Lens FPC. CN1200

Fig. 13

16

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-10 Separation of Center Cover


(1) Open the Multi Jack Cover, and remove three screws (t 1, u 2). (2) Remove three claws (five claws for DC10 E) , and detach the Center Cover, the Mode Switch, the Start/Stop Button, and the Multi Jack Cover. Note : When detaching the Center Cover, take care not to damage the claws part. (3) Detach the LED window, the Grip Belt Pin, and the Rear Grip Belt from the Center Cover.

Mode Switch (2)

Claws

(2)

Claw

(1) - u

LED Window

(2) Start Stop Button Grip Belt Pin (3) (3) (2) (1) - u Rear Grip Belt Multi Jack Cover

Center Cover

(1) - t

Claws

Center Cover

t
4.5mm Metal M1.7

u
3mm Metal M1.7

DC10 E only
Fig. 14

17

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Mode Switch as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Center Cover as shown in the figure below. (3) Insert the Multi Jack Cover after installing the Center Cover. (4) Do not attach the Start/Stop Button at this time point. Note : As long as the Start/Stop Button is not attached, the Disc Cover can be opened manually. Thus attach the Start/ Stop Button after all component parts are assembled.

Note on Reassembling (1) Align with the Switch.

Note on Reassembling (4)

Note Open the Disc Cover

Push it in.

Fix Mode Switch by sliding.

Insert into the Main Frame

Start Stop Button

Be careful not to remove the spring.

Note on Reassembling (2) Flash Cable Claw B Claw A

Claw A

Rib Flash Cable

Rib

1 1
Mode Switch

1. Fit the Mode Switch to the hole of the Center Cover and attach two claws A. ST Wire Protector 2. While exercising care not to pinch the Flash Cable, insert two claws B.

Zoom Photo Unit 3. Insert the Center Cover Rib under the Zoom Photo Unit.

End section of the Center Cover

Open Knob 4. While slightly lifting up the end section of the Center Cover, insert the Open Knob.

Fig. 15

18

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-11 Separation of Zoom Ass'y, CARD PCB


(1) Open the Disc Cover. (2) Remove two screws (f 1, g 1) , disconnect the CN100, and detach the Zoom Ass'y. (3) Remove two screws (a 2) , disconnect the CN50 and CN105, and detach the CARD PCB and the CARD FPC. (4) Remove solder () from the CARD PCB, and detach the LI Battery. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Mount the CARD FPC in the orientation indicated in the figure below.

Disc Cover (2) - g

(2) - f

(2) - f

(2) CN100 (3) (1) CN105 (3) (3) (1) CN50 Open the Disc Cover CARD PCB (3) - a (3) - a CARD FPC

Zoom Ass'y

LI Battery Solder (4)

Note on Reassembling (1) MAIN PCB CN105

CARD FPC

a
2.5mm

f
4.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

g
5.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

CARD PCB CN50

Metal M1.7

Fig. 16

19

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-12 Separation of MAIN PCB


(1) Detach the UL Tape. Remove three screws (a 3), disconnect the CN102, the CN107, the CN2100, and the CN2300, and detach the MAIN PCB. (2) Detach the GYRO FPC, the FLASH FPC, and the Main Spacer from the MAIN PCB.

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

GYRO FPC UL Tape (9 10mm) (1)

CN107 CN1201 (1) (2) (1) - a (1) - a (2) (1) CN2100 Main Spacer

(2) MAIN PCB (1)

CN103

CN102 CN2300 (1) FLASH FPC (1) - a


Fig. 17

20

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Main Spacer to the position indicated in the figure below. (2) Ensure that the GYRO FPC and the FLASH FPC are installed in the direction shown in the figure. (3) Attach the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1)

MAIN PCB IC100 Main Spacer

Attach the Main Spacer to the IC100 in alignment with the center position. Allowable attachment deviation: 0.5 mm

Note on Reassembling (2) GYRO PCB CN1601

Note on Reassembling (3) Screw hole should not be covered.

UL Tape (9 10mm)

GYRO FPC

MAIN PCB CN1201

CN107

MAIN PCB CN103 FLASH FPC

FLASH PCB CN 500

Fig. 18

21

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-13 Separation of TS Mech Section


(1) Open the Disc Cover. (2) Remove four screws (b 1, c 1, f 1, g 1), and detach the TS Mech Section, the Tripod Base, and the Gap Sheet. Note : After detaching the TS Mech Section, place it with its Lens part upward. Never touch the Lens part. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the TS Mech Section as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Gap Sheet to the position indicated in the figure below. (DC10 E only)

b
4.5mm Metal M1.7

c
6mm Metal M1.7 5.5mm

f
4.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

g
Metal M1.7 (self tap)

(2) - g (2)

(1)

(2) - b

(2) - f

(2) - c

(2)

Note on Reassembling (2) DC10 E only Gap Sheet Attachment Tripod Base reference

Tripod Base DC10 E only Gap Sheet

(2) (2) Attachment reference TS Mech Section Attachment reference Note Lens part (2) - b

Note on Reassembling (1)

Adjust to the notch.

Insert it in advance. Attach the Tripod Base.


Fig. 19

22

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-14 Separation of Main Frame


Note : After detaching the TS Mech Section, place it with its Lens part upward. Never touch the Lens part. When cleaning the cover surface part, wipe it with a dry clock without using a solvent for protection of the coating. (1) Remove four screws (a 4), and detach the Bottom Frame and the Card Holder. (2) Remove five screws (a 1, h 4), and detach the Chassis Damper, the Main Frame, and the AE FPC Ass'y. (3) Detach the Gasket and the ST Wire Protector (DC20 E only). (4) Disconnect the CN201, and detach the MAIN FPC, the FE FPC Shield, the Shield Sheet, and the D Cover Supporter.

Note

Cover surface part

(2) - h Chassis Damper Lens part Never touch. (2) - a AE FPC Ass'y (4) DC20 E only ST Wire Protector (2) (3) (3) (3) (3) CN201 Gasket Main Frame (1) (1) (3) Gasket Bottom Frame Card Holder (1) - a FE FPC Shield (4) MAIN FPC (4) (4) Gasket Chassis Damper (2) Chassis Damper D Cover Supporter (2) - h

Shield Sheet

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

h
5.3mm Metal M1.7 Stepped Screw

(1) - a
Fig. 20

23

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Mount the MAIN FPC in the orientation indicated in the figure below. And Attach the FE FPC Shield to the position indicated in the figure below. (2) Attach the D Cover Supporter to the position indicated in the figure below. (3) Attach the Shield Sheet as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1)

Note on Reassembling (2)

TS Mech section MH PCB CN201

FE FPC Shield

Attachment reference

Attachment reference

D Cover Supporter

Attachment reference Fold and attach

MAIN PCB CN2300 Note on Reassembling (3) Flexible cable reinforcing board(Back Side)

Wrap around the flexible cable. Overlapped attachment part: More than 2/3 shall be attached.

Attachment reference 1mm 1mm

Shield Sheet

Fig. 21

24

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING (4) Attach the Gasket and the ST Wire Protector (DC20 E only) to the position indicated in the figure below. (5) Attach the Main Frame as shown in the figure below. (6) Do not reuse the step screws (h 4) securing the Main Frame, because its tip is applied with adhesive for the prevention of loosening.

Note on Reassembling (4) Gasket Back side DC20 E only

Attachment reference Gasket Attachment reference

ST Wire Protector (DC20 E only) Gasket Gasket

Note on Reassembling (5)

TS Mech Recorder Ass'y Press the gasket. Gasket

Press the gasket in the arrow direction. Main Frame

Ensure that the four gaskets are securely pinched between the TS Mech Recorder Ass'y Frame and the Main Frame.

Press the gasket.

Gasket

Place the TS Mech Recorder Ass'y on the two gaskets other than the one shown above, and pinch them between.

Fig. 22

25

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-15 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 1


(1) Detach the Blindfold Sheet. (2) Remove five screws (i 4, j 1), and detach the GND Plate, the Back Barrier Plate section, and the GND Plate Spring. Note : Take care not to deform the GND Plate Spring. (3) Detach the Barrier Slide Holder, the Barrier Knob, and the LED Radiator Gum (DC20 E only).

Barrier Knob (3) DC20 E only LED Radiator Gum (3) GND Plate Spring (1) (2) - j

Back Barrier Plate section

(3)

(2) - i Barrier Slide Holder (2) GND Plate

Blindfold Sheet (2) - i (2) Lift up

Tweezers

i
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

j
3.5mm Black M1.7 (self tap)

Fig. 23

26

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Barrier Slide Holder as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the LED Radiator Gum to the position indicated in the figure below. (DC20 E only) (3) The Back Barrier Plate should be mounted as shown in the figure. After mounting it, slide the Barrier Slide Holder to check if the Barrier opens/closes smoothly. (4) Attach the Blindfold Sheet to the position indicated in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1)

Note on Reassembling (2)

LED Radiator Gum

FRONT FPC Barrier Slide Holder Barrier Arm Ass'y

Mount the Barrier Slide Holder with its convex section inserted to the Barrier Arm Ass'y hole.

DC20 E only Note on Reassembling (4) The edge part of the flexible cable should be positioned on the Blindfold Sheet.

Note on Reassembling (3)

Flexible cable

Adjust to the dowel.

FRONT FPC

Pass the flexible cable through it.

Fold the FRONT FPC, and attach the Blindfold Sheet. Blindfold Sheet Adjust to the step difference.

Back Barrier Plate section

Fig. 24

27

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-16 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 2


(1) Remove the CN899, and detach the Microphone Case, the Mic Ass'y, and the Microphone Case Cover from the Back Barrier Plate. (2) Remove double-sided tape and detach the MICROPHONE RELAY FPC. (3) Remove one screw (i 1), and detach the FRONT FPC.

FRONT FPC

(3)

Microphone Case (3) - i

Back Barrier Plate

MICROPHONE RELAY FPC

(2) Mic Ass'y (1)

i
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

Microphone Case Cover (1) Double Sided Tape (Back side) CN899

Fig. 25

28

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the MICROPHONE RELAY FPC as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Mic Ass'y as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Microphone Case Cover as shown in the figure below. (4) Attach the Mic Ass'y and the Microphone Case as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1) MICROPHONE RELAY FPC

Note on Reassembling (3) Back Barrier Plate

Adjust the hole position.

Insert the convex section into the opening of the Barrier Back Plate.

Attachment reference Microphone Case Cover Back Barrier Plate Note on Reassembling (4) Insert the flexible cable into the opening of the Barrier Back Plate. Flexible cable of Mic Ass'y CN899

Microphone Case Cover

Microphone Case

Microphone Case Cover

Note on Reassembling (2) Mic Ass'y

Microphone Case

Fig. 26

29

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-17 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 3


(1) Detach the Spring. (2) Detach the Barrier Bottom Holder, the Barrier Arm Ass'y, and the Lens Barrier.

Front Cover Ass'y

(2)

Barrier Bottom Holder

Lens Barrier

Spring Barrier Arm Ass'y (1)

Fig. 27

30

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Lens Barrier, Barrier Arm Ass'y, and Barrier Bottom Holder as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Spring as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> Front Cover Ass'y Rail section and side faces : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Note on Reassembling (1)

Barrier Bottom Holder

Dowel E Dowel C Dowel D Dowel F A

Dowel C

Dowel E

Dowel D Mount the Lens Barrier and the Barrier Arm Ass'y using the groove of section A of the Front Cover Ass'y. Insert dowels C, D, E and F into the holes and grooves of the Barrier Bottom Holder, respectively. Note on Reassembling (2) Spring Lens Barrier After mounting the Barrier Bottom Front Cover Ass'y Holder, check if the dowels D and E smoothly slide in the sliding Barrier Arm Ass'y range with dowel C used as supporting point.

Rib G

Rib G

Hook Hang one side of the spring on the hook. Instruction for Supply Mount the spring by inserting its tip into the hole of rib G.

Front Cover Ass'y Rail section and side faces Hanarl : KS-39M

Fig. 28

31

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-18 Disassembly of L Cover Unit


(1) Remove four screws (f 2, g 2), and detach the Flash Ass'y and the LC Cover. (DC20 E only) (1) Remove four screws (f 4), and detach the LC Cover. (DC10 E only) (2) Slide the Lock Plate, open the Disc Cover, remove two screws (a 2), and detach the Lock Ass'y and the Gap Sheet. (3) Remove one screw (g 1), and detach the Disc Cover Ass'y and the Front Grip Belt. (4) Remove two screws (a 2), and detach the Friction Plate.

Disc Cover Ass'y Friction Plate (4) Front Grip Belt (4) - a Left Cover (3) (3)

LC Cover (1) - g

(1) (2) Gap Sheet (2) - a (3) - g (3)

(1) - f (1)

(1) - f

Flash Ass'y DC20 E only (2)

(1) - f

Lock Ass'y

Lock Plate (2) Slide

(1) - f LC Cover

DC10 E only Disc Cover Ass'y

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

f
4.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

g
5.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) Fig. 29

32

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Friction Plate as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Disc Cover and the Front Grip Belt as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Gap Sheet to the position indicated in the figure below. (4) Incorporate the Flash Ass'y into the LC Cover and mount it into the Left Cover. Be sure to fasten two screws of the Flash Ass'y first (DC20 E only). <Instruction for Supply> Disc Cover Ass'y sliding surface: Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Note on Reassembling (1) Disc Cover Ass'y Base section Dowel groove Open

Friction Plate

For mounting the Left Cover, ensure that the Disc Cover Ass'y base section should be open as shown in the figure above.

Mount the Friction Plate in the Disc Cover Ass'y with its dowel and hole fit into the groove and dowel, respectively. Note on Reassembling (2) Front Grip Belt LC Cover Flash Ass'y Note on Reassembling (4) Left Cover DC20 E only

Fasten the screws. Disc Cover Ass'y Base Insert the Disc Cover Ass'y Base into the Front Grip Belt. Attachment reference Instruction for Supply

Note on Reassembling (3)

Sliding part

Attachment reference Gap Sheet

Disc Cover Ass'y Hanarl : KS-39M


Fig. 30

Sliding part

33

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-19 Disassembly of Lock Ass'y


(1) Detach the D Cover Switch, the D Cover Spring, and the Light Shield Sheet. Note : Be careful not to miss the D Cover Spring and not to damage the Switch. (2) Remove two screws (k 2), and detach the AV Holder, the AV FPC Ass'y, and the Gap Sheet. (3) Remove two screws (u 2), and open the Gear Motor Ass'y. (4) Remove five screws (k 5) , and unsolder () at four places, and detach the Gear Motor Ass'y and the SW FPC Ass'y. (5) Detach the Open Knob, the Open Knob Spring, and the Lock Base Sheet. Note : Take care not to lose the Spring.

Detach by sliding rightward.

D Cover Spring

D Cover Switch

k
2mm Metal M1.7

D Cover Switch (1) Light Shield Sheet

(1)

AV FPC Ass'y AV Gap Holder Sheet (2) (2)

u
3mm Metal M1.7

(2)

Be careful not to damage the Switch.

Lock Ass'y (3) (2) - k (3) - u (4) - k SW FPC Ass'y Gear Motor Ass'y (3) (4) - k (4) (5) Open (3) - u

Lock Base Sheet (4) - k (5) Detach by sliding downward. Open Knob Open Knob Spring (4) Solder Lock Ass'y

Open Knob Spring (4) - k

(5)

Open Knob Gear Motor Ass'y

Gear Motor Ass'y

Solder

SW FPC Ass'y

Fig. 31

34

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Open Knob and the Open Knob Spring as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Lock Base Sheet to the position indicated in the figure below. (3) Solder the SW FPC Ass'y to the Gear Motor and attach them as indicated in the figure below. (4) Attach the Gap Sheet to the position indicated in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1) Open Knob A

Note on Reassembling (2) Lock Base Sheet

B Attachment reference Make them hit by the standing sections. Lock Ass'y

Lock Ass'y Lock Ass'y While compressing the Open Mount the Open Knob Spring, insert the Open Knob Spring. Knob sections A and B into the slit of Lock Ass'y. Note on Reassembling (3) D Cover Switch

Insert

Dowels Align with the dowels at two places. Eject Switch

Bend the flexible cable.

Dowel

Solder

Dowels Align with the dowels at two places.

Solder Dowel Align with the dowels at two places.

Note on Reassembling (4) Gap Sheet AV Holder

Attach to the center on the wall surface of the AV Holder.

Fig. 32

35

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (5) When using the AV FPC Ass'y supplied as a service part, fold it as shown in the figure below. (6) Attach the AV FPC Ass'y and the AV Holder as shown in the figure below. (7) Attach the D Cover SW and the D Cover Spring as shown in the figure below. (8) Attach the Light Shield Sheet to the position indicated in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (5)

Double Sided Tape (Back side)

Note on Reassembling (6)

Attachment reference AV FPC Ass'y Folding in a crest form Folding in a trough form Double Sided Tape (3 13mm) (Back side)

AV FPC Ass'y

Attach it by making it hit against the end.

AV Holder AV Jack

Insert the AV Jack into the AV Holder and attach it so that the dowel is aligned with.

Note on Reassembling (7) D Cover Switch Be careful not to damage the switch at the back side. Insert into the slit

Dowel

Note on Reassembling (8) AV FPC Ass'y

Attachment reference

Attach the D Cover Spring. D Cover SW Align with the screw hole of the Lock Ass'y. Light Shield Sheet Lock Ass'y Attachment reference

D Cover Spring

Fig. 33

36

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-20 Separation of LCD Ass'y


(1) Detach the Right Sponge. (2) Remove four screws (i 2, k 1, l 1), and detach the Hinge Plate. (3) Open the LCD Ass'y. Remove two screws (k 2), and detach the LCD Ass'y. Note : Take care not to damage the LCD Switch. (4) Detach the Lid Jig Connection.

(2) - i Hinge Plate

(2) - l (2) Lid Jig Connection (4) (2) - k LCD Switch (3) (1) (3) - k Right Sponge

Tweezers

(3)

i
LCD Ass'y
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

k
2mm Metal M1.7

l
5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

Fig. 34

37

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the LCD Ass'y as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Hinge Plate as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Right Sponge as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1) Attach the LCD Ass'y and while holding the upper section of the Hinge, attach two screws (3) - k .

Note on Reassembling (2) LCD Hinge Cable

Hinge Plate

Battery Terminal

(3) Close Hinge Gap Cover (3) Pass the flexible cable through under the lower plate. Dowels With the LCD Ass'y closed, pass the LCD Hinge Cable through the Battery Terminal, and attach the Hinge Plate so that its holes are aligned with the dowels.

Note on Reassembling (3)

Right Sponge

While folding the Right Sponge as indicated in the figure, attach it at the position shown in the figure.

Fig. 35

38

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-21 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1


(1) Turn the LCD Hinge Ass'y in the direction indicated in the figure shown below, and then remove two screws (d 2). (2) Disengage claws A, B, C, D, E, and F (six positions), and detach the LCD Top Cover Ass'y. (3) Disconnect the CN901 and the CN903, and detach the LCD Hinge Ass'y. <Note on Reassembling> (1) To attach the LCD Top Cover Ass'y, insert the Claws E and F first, and then the Claws D, B, C, and A in this order.

LCD Hinge Ass'y

(1) (3) CN903 (3) (3)

(1) - d

Claw A Claw B

(2)

CN901 Claw E

(1) - d

Claw C Claw F LCD Top Cover Ass'y Claw D

Note on Reassembling (1) LCD Top Cover Ass'y Claw A Claw B

d
3mm Metal M1.7

Claw C Claw D Claw F

Claw E

Fig. 36

39

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-22 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2


(1) Remove LCD Sheet 2 (2 pcs.). (2) Remove one screw (k 1), unsolder part (), and disconnect the CN902, and then demount the LCD PCB, the LCD Shield sheet, the LCD Back Light Ass'y, the LCD Panel, and the LCD Frame. (3) Detach the LCD Sheet 1.

LCD Bottom Cover

LCD Sheet 1

LCD Frame (3)

LCD Panel

LCD Back Light Ass'y

LCD Shield Sheet

LCD PCB

(2) (2) - k (2) Solder (1) LCD Sheet 2 CN902 (1) (2) LCD Sheet 2

k
2mm Metal M1.7

Fig. 37

40

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the LCD Sheet 1 to the position indicated in the figure below. (2) Attach the parts ranging from the LCD Frame to the LCD PCB as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the LCD Sheet 2 to the position indicated in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (2) GND Spring section A LCD Panel

Push in

LCD Frame A B

LCD Bottom Cover

1. Push the LCD Panel into the GND Spring section and then into the sections A and B. LCD Back Light Ass'y Attachment reference

2. Attach it to the LCD Bottom Cover.

LCD Frame

Make it hit against the end.

LCD Back Light Ass'y LCD Shield Sheet 3. With the four sections C aligned with the LCD Back Light Ass'y, stick the LCD Shield Sheet. Push into the hole. LCD PCB 4. Attach the LCD Back Light Ass'y.

Solder

LCD BACK LIGHT FPC 5. Attach the LCD PCB. Note on Reassembling (1) LCD Bottom Cover LCD Sheet 1 Adjust them. 6.Assemble the parts and solder () them.

Note on Reassembling (3) Align with the sheet LCD Sheet 2 metal of LCD Frame. Attachment reference : Attachment 1 mm reference : 1 mm

Attachment reference : 1 mm Align with the end of the angle R.

Attachment reference : 2 mm

Wrinkle and slippage not allowed.

Attachment Attachment reference : reference : 1 mm 1 mm Align with the step difference. Wrinkle and slippage not allowed.
Fig. 38

41

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-23 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Ass'y


(1) Disengage four claws A, and detach the Hinge Cover. Note1 : When pulling the Connector section of the LCD Hinge Ass'y cable from the hole in the Hinge Cover, be careful about damage. (2) unsolder () at two places, and detach the LCD Hinge SW Wire. (3) Remove two screws (m 1, r 1), and detach the Wire Protect and the LCD HINGE PCB. Note2 : Take care not to damage the LCD Hinge SW. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the LCD HINGE PCB as shown in the figure below. (2) Soldering of the LCD Hinge SW Wire to the LCD HINGE PCB should be done after passing it through the rotating section of the Hinge.

LCD Hinge SW Wire (2)

LCD HINGE PCB Solder (3) - m (3)

Hinge Cover Claws A (1) (3) (2) LCD Hinge Ass'y

(3) - r

Wire Protect

m
3mm Metal M1.4

r
2.5mm Metal M1.4

Claws A Note 1 Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2) LCD Hinge SW Wire Hinge Cover Solder Dowel Pull out LCD Hinge SW LCD HINGE PCB SW operation section Connecter Attach it at the location where the SW operating section does not touch the LCD Hinge SW.
Fig. 39

42

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-24 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 1


(1) Detach the CVF Dust Cover, and remove one screw (i 1), and then detach the CVF L Cover and CVF Eyecup. (2) Peel of the UL Tape, and remove one screw (i 1), and then detach the CVF GND Plate, the CVF Diop Plate, the CVF Diop Knob, the CVF Diop Rubber, and the CVF Lens Holder. (3) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CVF Lens.

CVF Eyecup

CVF Lens

CVF L Cover

CVF Lens Holder Claws A (1) (3)

CVF Dust Cover

(1)

(2) CVF Dust Cover

(1)

Tweezers

CVF Diop Knob (1) - i (2) CVF Diop Rubber (2) CVF Diop Plate (2)

CVF GND Plate

i
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) Fig. 40

(2) - i UL Tape (7 15mm)

43

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the CVF Lens as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the CVF Diop Plate, the CVF Diop Knob, and the CVF Diop Rubber as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> CVF Diop Rubber sliding surface : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Note on Reassembling (1)

Note on Reassembling (1) CVF Diop Plate CVF Diop Knob CVF Diop Rubber

CVF Lens Holder Claws A

CVF Lens CVF Lens Holder

With the angular section aligned, push into the claws A.

Note on Reassembling (3) Attachment reference CVF SUB FPC

Instruction for Supply CVF Diop Rubber sliding surface

Attachment reference

CVF Diop Knob UL Tape (7 15mm) Hanarl : KS-39M

Fig. 41

44

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-25 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 2


(1) Peel of the UL Tape, disengage two claws A, and disconnect the CN4102, and then detach the CVF PCB, the CVF Reflector, the CVF Diffuser, the CVF Cushion, and the CVF LCD section. (2) Disconnect the CN4101, and detach the CVF SUB FPC. (3) Disengage four claws B, and detach the CVF Panel Holder 2, the CVF LCD, and the CVF Panel Holder 1. Note : Since the CVF LCD is made of glass alone, be careful of its handling.

CVF Panel Holder 1 CVF Inner Case Claws B CVF LCD

Claws B

(3)

CVF Panel Holder 2 CVF Cushion CVF Diffuser CVF Reflector

CVF LCD section

(1) CVF PCB

CN4102 Claw A (1)

(1)

Claw A (2)

CN4101 UL Tape (9 20mm) CVF SUB FPC


Fig. 42

45

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the CVF Panel Holder 2, the CVF LCD, and the CVF Panel Holder 1 as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the CVF Reflector as shown in the figure below. (3) The CVF PCB should be attached with the CVF SUB FPC mounted, as indicated in the figure. (4) Attach the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below. (5) Before using the CVF SUB FPC supplied as a service part, provide preliminary folding at the position indicated in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> Sliding Rail section of CVF Inner Case : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Note on Reassembling (1) CVF Panel Holder 2

Note on Reassembling (2) Pass the CVF LCD through the hole. CVF LCD CVF Cushion CVF Reflector

The step difference side should face the CVF Panel Holder side.

CVF Panel Holder 1 Insert to the inside of the rib. Note on Reassembling (3) CVF PCB C Note on Reassembling (4) Fold the Flexible cable of the CVF LCD. Attachment reference D CVF SUB FPC Dowel Dowel

CN4102 CVF PCB Attachment reference

Insert the claws and dowels at the section C, and then push in the section D and fix it. Note on Reassembling (5) SUB PCB CN1501 Folding in a trough form

Fix the flexible cable with UL Tape (9 20mm) Instruction for Supply

Sliding Rail section of CVF Inner Case, 8 points.

CVF PCB CN4101 Hanarl : KS-39M


Fig. 43

46

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-26 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 1


(1) Open the Jack Cover. Remove three screws (k 1, l 2), and detach the Jack Ass'y, the Jack Cover, and the Right Side Gasket. (2) Remove one screw (l 1), unsolder (), and detach the DC JACK PCB and the DC Wire. (3) Remove one screw (e 1), and detach the USB FPC Ass'y and the USB Holder.

DC Jack Holder

(3) - e

(2) DC JACK PCB (3) DC Wire USB Holder

(2) Solder (2) - l (Back side)

USB FPC Ass'y

(1) - l

Right Side Gasket

(1) - k

(1)

(1) - l (1) (1) Jack Ass'y Jack Cover

e
3.5mm Metal M1.7

k
2mm Metal M1.7

l
5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) Fig. 44

47

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the DC Wire and the DC JACK PCB as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Jack Cover as shown in the figure below. (3) Before using the USB FPC supplied as a service part, provide preliminary folding at the position indicated in the figure below. (4) Attach the Right Side Gasket onto the Key Flame.

Note on Reassembling (1)

DC JACK PCB Hook DC Wire Solder DC Wire Black Solder two wires each Red together. Yellow

Mount the DC Wire by passing it through the hook. Note on Reassembling (2) Note on Reassembling (3)

Insert into hole

USB FPC

Key Frame Folding in a crest form

Jack Cover Note on Reassembling (4) Right Side Gasket Key Frame Right Side Gasket

Fig. 45

48

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-27 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 2


(1) Remove four screws (i 3, k 1), and detach the Key Frame, the Speaker, and the Rear Key FPC Ass'y. (2) unsolder () at two places, and detach the Speaker Wire. (3) Detach the Center SW Knob and the Center SW knob Dumper from the Rear Key FPC Ass'y. (4) Detach the SD Cover.

(1) Make the SD Cover Hinge section escape. Key Frame

(2)

(3)

Rear Key FPC Ass'y Center SW Knob Dumper

Solder Detach the Rear Key FPC from the dowel and make it escape. (1) - i (2) Speaker Center SW Knob

(1) - i

Speaker Wire (3)

(1) - i Speaker

Rear Key FPC Ass'y

SD Cover Speaker Wire

A
Key Frame (4)

(1)

i
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

k
2mm Metal M1.7

(1) - k

Fig. 46

49

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the SD Cover as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Center SW Knob and the Center SW Knob Dumper as shown in the figure below. (3) Attach the Rear Key FPC Ass'y as shown in the figure below. (4) Treat the Speaker Wire as shown in the figure. (5) Tighten the Key Frame together with the Rear Key FPC at one place.

Note on Reassembling (1) Key Frame SD Cover

Note on Reassembling (2) Rear Key FPC Ass'y Center SW Knob Dumper The shiny face should be on the SW side. Center SW Knob Align the characters (SET) with the horizontal direction.

Switch Insert

Note on Reassembling (3) Check the Slide SW Knob by looking through the hole. Lever of Slide SW Rear Key FPC Ass'y

Note on Reassembling (5) Key Frame

Dowel Dowel

Insert the Slide SW lever into the concave section of the Slide SW Knob. Check if it operates.

Dowels Place the REAR KEY FPC and fix it with screws. Key Frame Speaker The speaker mounting reference : 1 mm Rib Pass through the slit of the rib. Dowel

Note on Reassembling (4)

The soldered section on the Speaker should not touch the Key Frame.

Pass through under the rib. Pass through the hook.


Fig. 47

50

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-28 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 3


(1) Detach the Slide SW Knob, the Rear SW Knob, the DP Window, the Menu SW Knob, and the Card Access Window.

Menu SW Knob

Rear SW Knob

(1)

(1)

Card Access Window

(1) (1) DP Window

(1) Slide SW Knob

Rear Cover

Fig. 48

51

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-29 Disassembly of Camera Unit


(1) Remove two screws (i 2) , and detach the Lens Holder, the Right Side Gasket, the ST Wire Protector (DC20 E only), the CCD PCB Absorber, the CCD GND Plate, and the Lens Sponge. Note : Take care not to deform the CCD GND Plate. (2) Remove one screw (a 1) , and detach the CCD Heatsink Plate. (3) Remove two screws (f 2) , and detach the CCD Ass'y, the CCD Rubber, the Optical IR Filter, and the Shield Sheet.

(2) - a CCD Heatsink Plate

Optical IR Filter CCD GND Plate (3) (1) (1) - i (1) Lens Sponge DC20 E only ST Wire Protector CCD Rubber (1) (1) CCD Ass'y Right Side Gasket Lens Holder (1) - i CCD Shield Sheet Face thick side toward CCD side DC10 E only CCD Rubber CCD Ass'y CCD PCB Absorber (3) - f CCD PCB Absorber (3) (1) (1) (3) - f (1) (2) (1)

a
2.5mm Metal M1.7

f
4.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

Lens

i
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

CCD IR Filter

Fig. 49

52

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the CCD Shield Sheet as shown in the figure below. (2) Attach the Right Side Gasket and the ST Wire Protector (DC20 E only) to the position indicated in the figure below. (3) Attach the Lens Holder as shown in the figure below. (4) Attach the Lens Sponge as shown in the figure below. (5) Attach the CCD PCB Absorber as shown in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1) CCD Ass'y

Note on Reassembling (3)

Fold and attach CCD Shield Sheet

Range of attachment reference

Lens Holder

CCD FPC Pass the CCD FPC through the openings of Lens Holder and attach it.

Note on Reassembling (2) Lens Holder Lens Holder ST Wire Protector DC20 E only

Note on Reassembling (5) Adjust to the flange part of ST Wire Protector DC10 E only

Right Side Gasket Attachment reference

Note on Reassembling (4)

Attachment reference

CCD PCB Lens Sponge IG Meter Ass'y CCD PCB Absorber

Attachment reference Bring attachment to bear on the edge of the IG Meter Ass'y.

Attachment reference

Attachment reference Make attachment meet the outline of the PCB.


Fig. 50

53

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-30 Disassembly of Lens Unit


(1) Peel off the UL Tape. (2) Remove eight screws (n 5, o 1, p 1, q 1), unsolder points , and detach the IG Meter Ass'y, the PZ Motor, the Photo Interrupter, the Guide Bar ( 3), and the SR Head, etc.

o
3mm

p
3mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)

q
4mm Metal M1.4 (self tap)

4mm Metal Metal M1.4 M1.4 (self tap) (self tap)

Dowels (2) - o UL Tape (9 20mm) (2) - n

(2) - (2) -

(2) - p Guide Bar 31mm Guide Bar 14mm Guide Bar 40mm (2)

(2) - n

A
(1) Photo Interrupter PZ Motor

C
(2)

(2) - (2) -

(2) - n (2)

B C
IG Meter Ass'y (2) - q

IG Meter Ass'y

(2) - q

PZ Motor

(2) - n

Fig. 51

54

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) After engaging the VCM FPC with the groove A and dowel B, provide soldering. Then, mount the IRIS MAIN FPC so that it is secured with the rib C of the CCD Holder. (2) Attach the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.

Note on Reassembling (1)

IRIS MAIN FPC Rib C VCM FPC

Dowels B Groove A

CCD Holder

Note on Reassembling (2) Attachment reference

UL Tape (9 20mm)

Fig. 52

55

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-31 List of Screws Used


SYMBOL SYMBOL

PARTS NO.

REMARKS

ILLUST

PARTS NO.

REMARKS

ILLUST

XA1-7170-257

M1.7-2.5mm

Metal

2.5mm

XA4-9170-507

Self Tap M1.7-5.0mm Metal

5mm

XA1-7170-457

M1.7-4.5mm

Metal

4.5mm

m XA1-7140-307

M1.4-3.0mm

Metal

3mm

XA9-1710-000

M1.7-6.0mm

Metal

6mm

XA4-9140-407

Self Tap M1.4-4.0mm Self Tap M1.4-3.0mm Self Tap M1.7-3.0mm Self Tap M1.4-4.0mm Metal Metal Metal Metal

4mm

XA1-7170-307

M1.7-3.0mm

Metal

3mm

XA4-9140-307

3mm

XA1-7170-357

M1.7-3.5mm

Metal

3.5mm

YB1-0405-000

3mm

XA4-9170-457

Self Tap M1.7-4.5mm Self Tap M1.7-5.5mm Metal Metal 4.5mm

YB1-0163-000

4mm

XA4-9170-557

5.5mm

XA1-7140-257

M1.4-2.5mm

Metal

2.5mm

XA9-1700-000

Stepped Screw M1.7-5.3mm Self Tap M1.7-4.0mm Self Tap M1.7-3.5mm Black Metal Metal

5.3mm s

XA9-1705-000

M1.7-2.5mm

Metal

2.5mm

XA4-9170-407

4mm

XA9-1709-000

M1.7-4.5mm

Metal

4.5mm

XA4-9170-359

3.5mm

XA9-1706-000

M1.7-3.0mm

Metal

3mm

XA1-7170-207

M1.7-2.0mm

Metal

2mm

XA9-1707-000

M1.7-3.5mm

Metal

3.5mm

56

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

1-32 List of Disassembly Photos

Right Side (DC20 E)

Right Side (DC10 E)

R-LCD Unit

Front Cover Unit

Left Cover Unit (DC20 E)

Left Cover Unit (DC10 E)

57

DC10 E, DC20 E DISASSEMBLING

Camera Recorder Unit

TS Mech Recorder Ass'y

Camera Unit (DC20 E)

Camera Unit (DC10 E)

Rear Cover Unit

LCD Unit

58

SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT


CONTENTS
1. Maintenance Tools ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 List of Maintenance Tools -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 2. Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 2-1 Using the Extension Connector -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 3. Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 3-4 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 3-5 Service Mode Transition Card (DY9-1406-000) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6 4. Description of Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7 4-1 Error Rate --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 4-2 Commands Particular to Camera ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 4-3 Checking the Lens Resetting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 4-4 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-4-1 CCM MI-COM Input Port ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-4-2 CCM MI-COM A/D Port -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-4-3 SUB MI-COM Input Port -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-4-4 SUB MI-COM A/D Port --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-4-5 BACK END MI-COM Input Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 5. Adjustment Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12 5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 5-2 CCD Section (1) - CCD Image Adjustment - (DC20 E only) -------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 5-2-1 Internal Camera Temperature Check (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 5-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 5-2-3 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (1) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 5-2-4 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (2) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 5-2-5 Internal Camera Temperature Check (2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 5-2-6 CCD Image Adjustment (Low Temperature) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 5-2-7 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check (Low Temperature) ----------------------------------------------------------- 21 5-3 AF Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 5-3-1 VCM Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 23 5-3-2 CZ Automatic Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 5-3-3 Cam Correction (AUTO) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 5-4 IS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 5-4-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 5-4-2 Data Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 5-5 CCD Section (2) (DC20 E only) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 5-5-1 Internal Camera Temperature Check (3) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 5-5-2 CCD Image Adjustment (High Temperature) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 5-5-3 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29 5-6 Camera Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31 5-6-1 Iris Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31 5-6-2 WB Adjustment (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 5-6-3 Color Balance Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 5-6-4 WB Adjustment (2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33 5-6-5 WB Adjustment (3) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33

5-6-6 Data Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33 5-6-7 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34 5-7 Recorder Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 5-7-1 Playback error rate check -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 5-7-2 Self-recording error rate check -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 5-7-3 LCD PCB Setting Destination --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 5-8 CVF Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 38 5-8-1 Forced CVF ON, Adjustment Image (B/W) Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------- 38 5-8-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38 5-8-3 COM-DC Level Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39 5-8-4 COM Amplitude Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 5-8-5 Brightness Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 41 5-8-6 Contrast Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42 5-8-7 Release of Forced CVF ON ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 43

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

1. Maintenance Tools
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
Item Name Color bar chart Color Viewer 5600 K for 220V Color Viewer 5600 K for 240V Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K Filter, CCA W1246mm Card, Mini SD, Service Mode Extension connector (24pin) CCD image adjustment tool Mount, 27 mm DVD-R reference DISC (PAL) CCD image adjustment tool modification kit Item Number Purpose Remarks

DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment (for 220) DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment (for 240) DY9-2040-000 Replacement DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment DY9-1406-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment, check With AD adapter DY9-1390-000 T est pin extended DY9-1391-000 Camera electrical adjustment DY9-1403-000 Camera electrical adjustment DY9-1408-000 Playback error rate check DY9-1404-000 CCD image adjustment tool modification T S Mech

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

2. Setting
(1) Carry out all the adjustment and check procedures in the product state.

2-1 Using the Extension Connector


When performing CVF adjustment (optional adjustment item), use the extension connector (DY9-1390-000). For standard adjustment items, the extension connector is not necessary. (1) Detach the LID JIG CONNECTION. (2) Connect the extension connector to the CN2900.

<Signals used>
Pin No. 3 4 13 14 Signal Designation GND EVF HD EVF R EVF COM AC Pin No. 15 16 18 Signal Designation EVF G EVF B EVF COM DC

LID JIG CONNECTION


Fig. 1

Fig. 2

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

3. Service Modes
3-1 Outline
(1) The service mode in this equipment uses the wireless remote controller. (To be used in remote control code 2) * The remote controller furnished with the instrument cannot transfer to the service mode. For this purpose, use the remote controller (ex. WL-D84) furnished with a conventional product. (2) For changeover to the service mode, a dedicated tool (CARD, MINI SD, SERVICE MODE: DY9-1406-000) is required in addition to the wireless remote controller. (3) Mode changeover is available between the service mode and the normal mode using the Audio dubbing and SLOW keys of the wireless remote controller. As long as power is ON, the service mode is available even if the CARD, MINI SD, SERVICE MODE is removed. (4) In the service mode, changeover of the main unit operation mode can be handle using the keys on the main unit and the attached remote controller, but the usable keys are restricted. (5) In the service mode, safety function such as for low voltage detection is canceled. (6) On the Index screen in the motion picture playback mode, it is not possible to changeover to the service mode due to the system mechanism. During playback, changeover to the service mode is available.

3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode


(1) Set the Service Mode Card (DY9-1406-000) in the card slot on the equipment and change over to the camera mode. (2) Press the "Dubbing" key on the wireless remote controller (WL-D84) that is set at Remote controller code 2. * To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press Remote controller setting and Zoom T keys simultaneously for 2 sec. (3) Now the changeover to the service mode has been completed and the SERVICE MODE appears on the screen.

DY9-1406-000

Fig. 3

* Pressing the SLOW key performs the changeover to the normal mode from the service mode. As long as the power supply is ON, the service mode is available by setting the Audio dubbing key even if the Service Mode Card is removed. * After completion of repairing, press the Reset button to release the service mode completely.

Fig. 4

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode


(1) To use the wireless remote controller in the service mode, set it at Remote controller code 2. * To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press the Remote controller setting and Zoom T keys simultaneously for 2 sec. * The remote controller furnished with the instrument cannot transfer to the service mode. For this purpose, use the remote controller (ex. WL-D84) furnished with a conventional product.

4. SEARCH + 3. START/STOP 5. SEARCH 11. PLAY 8. FF 6. FRAME + 9. REW 12. STOP 7. FRAME 2. SLOW
WL-D84

10. SEARCH SELECT

Remote Controller Code 2 setting

1. DUBBING

13. PAUSE

Fig. 5

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Key Designation (in Normal Mode) DUBBING SLOW START/STOP SEARCH + SEARCH FRAME + FRAME FF REW SEARCH SELECT PLAY STOP PAUSE

Key Designation (in Service Mode) SERVICE MODE NORMAL MODE CS+ FUNCTION + FUNCTION HIGH ADDRESS + HIGH ADDRESS ADDRESS + ADDRESS MODE SELECT DATA + DATA STORE

Function Change over to service mode Change over to normal mode Increases CS by 1. Increases FUNCTION by 1. Decreases FUNCTION by 1. Increases HIGH ADDRESS by 1. Decreases HIGH ADDRESS by 1. Increases ADDRESS by 1. Decreases ADDRESS by 1. Change over to RD/WR mode Increases DATA by 1. Decreases DATA by 1. Defines/w rites DATA.

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

3-4 Indication in Service Mode


Shown below are the indications in the service mode.

4 1 2 3 7

13

12

8 9 14 10 11

Fig. 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Indicates that the service mode is currently selected. (SERV) MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST) Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA,MD, CA, CD, etc.) CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F) Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF) ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF) DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF) Indicates the version of the MAIN program in the BACK END MI-COM. Indicates the version of the FRONT END.

10. Indicates the version of the CCM MI-COM. 11. Indicates the version of the flash memory program mounted outside the CCM MI-COM. 12. Indicates the error rate. 13. Data Write status (00: READ mode, 04 : Write preparation, OC : Write execution) 14. ST : Adjustment status (02: During adjustment, 05: OK in adjustment result, 09: NG in adjustment result)* * A numeric value to be indicated varies depending on the adjustment item concerned.

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

3-5 Service Mode Transition Card (DY9-1406-000)


Note)
(1) The Service Mode Card is applicable as a general-purpose mini SD card for the video camera (image writing/reading/erasing). No functional problem will occur in this application. Note, however, that a trouble may take place if initialization is made by using the video camera/PC. Do not perform initialization with the video camera/PC. (2) On the Service Mode Card, a tag and seal are attached for the purposes of discrimination from a general-purpose mini SD card and for prevention of unintentional disinstallation mistake. Therefore, a clearance in the card slot is somewhat smaller. When inserting/ removing the service mode transition card, take care not to damage it.

DY9-1406-000

Fig. 7

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

4. Description of Service Modes


4-1 Error Rate
<Outline>
(1) An error rate is calculated from an error correction factor of digital data read out of the disc concerned. The playback performance can be checked of the sector corresponding to the calculated error rate. (2) The error rate may vary depending on the disc condition, performance of pickup unit (tracking, focusing, laser), and performance of the RF circuit, etc. (3) The lower the error rate gets, the better the playback performance gets. Poor image quality Good image quality 2 . 10 < . 104

<How to output an error rate>


By the operation in step 1 below, an error rate can be output during playback.
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) 0 Function 05 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 0001 ST RD DT 00 01 Product setting. 00 Error rate indication. Microcomputer operation

* It takes 7 to 20 seconds to indicate an error rate, because it is calculated from large amount of data. * To measure an error rate again, it is once required to stop the playback. * Unlike measurements of DVCs, an audio-only error rate is not available.

<How to read an error rate>


Example) 0324 is indicated: Error rate = 3.210 -4

0324

3.2 10
Fig. 8

-4

Error rate indication

Fig. 9

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

4-2 Commands Particular to Camera


<Outline>
(1) The commands particular to camera are provided for checking the operation. (2) Make preparation according to the table below and carry out the desired commands particular to camera. (3) To restore any setting back to the original status, press the PAUSE key (STORE) for each item again in the ST mode. Turning the power OFF/ON resets all the settings.
PROCEDURE CAM SPECIAL COMMAND WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WB 1) Make setting shown at right. LOCK 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WB 1) Make setting shown at right. T URBO 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WB 1) Make setting shown at right. OUT DOOR 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WB 1) Make setting shown at right. INDOOR 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. OPEN 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. CLOSE 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. MAX 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. MIN 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) COLOR 1) Make setting shown at right. BAR 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) White 1) Make setting shown at right. 100% 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) White 1) Make setting shown at right. 50% 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) BLACK & 1) Make setting shown at right. WHIT E 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) GRAY 1) Make setting shown at right. SCALE 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) WHIT E 1) Make setting shown at right. LED ON 2) Perform storing. (Press the PAUSE button.) ST EP MONIT OR ADDR MODE 3300 ST RD 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3309 330A 330B 330C 330D 330F 3310 331F ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD Microcomputer operation DT -------------------------------

CS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Function 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08

WB is set.

WB is locked.

WB high-speed setting mode

WB outdoor mode

WB indoor mode

T he iris is opened forcibly.

T he iris is closed forcibly.

A value of AGC gain is maximized.

A value of AGC gain is minimized.

Outputs color bar from DIGIC DV.

Outputs white 100% from DIGIC DV.

Outputs white 50% from DIGIC DV. Outputs white & black chart from DIGIC DV.

Outputs gray scale from DIGIC DV. Force the white LED to light.

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

4-3 Checking the Lens Resetting


<Outline>
(1) Set up addresses according to the table shown below. Thus, using data marked with the arrows in the figure below, you can check whether lens resetting has been completed or not. * In case of 40 or 44, the zoom lens has not yet been reset. * In case of 80 or 84, the focus lens has not yet been reset. * In case of D4, the zoom lens and focus lens has been completion.
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 Function 08 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 312E RD DT -RAM data indication Microcomputer operation

Fig. 10

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

4-4 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches


<Outline>
(1) The CCM and SUB MI-COM terminals can be checked in the service mode. With this function, the key-related operations and the connections between the keys and the MI-COM terminals can be checked in the product state. (2) Perform the check in the RD mode.

4-4-1 CCM MI-COM Input Port


PIN NAME Description Detection memory card loading Start / Stop SW Halfway pressing of Photo SW Full pressing of Photo SW CS Function ADDR 1 1 1 1 01 01 01 01 0014 000E 000E 000E DATA Description BIT 5 "L" for memory card loading 4 5 6 "L" at the ON time "L" at the ON time "L" at the ON time

E13 CARD DET U13 START STOP T13 Half Photo Switch R13 Photo Switch

4-4-2 CCM MI-COM A/D Port


PIN C6 B6 A6 C5 E8 A8 B7 A6 C3 A4 NAME KEY AD3 KEY AD2 KEY AD1 KEY AD0 ZOOM KEY I ENC Y GYRO P GYRO M ODE DIAL 1 M ODE DIAL 0 Description KEY AD 3 KEY AD 2 KEY AD 1 KEY AD 0 Zoom key output IRIS ENC output Yaw GYRO output Pith GYRO output AE M ode (SCN) AE M ode (P) CS Function ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 0005 0004 0003 0002 0016 0014 0011 0010 000A 000B AD DATA (00FF) Low High UP(00) DOWN(40) SET(80) M ENU(C0) RIGHT(00) LEFT (40) PRINT(80) FUNC(C0) REW (00) FINAL(40) B.L (80) W.TV(C0) STOP (00) PLAY (40) FF (80) DISP(C0) WIDE Small diaphragm CENTER TELE Open

SCN (00) P (00

4-4-3 SUB MI-COM Input Port


PIN 21 12 20 25 32 33 NAME M ovie/Still SW DC J DET Eject Switch Li3V Detect CAM Power Switch Power Switch Description M ovie/Still SW DC JACK detection EJECT SW detection Detection of decrease in lithium battery voltage POWER SW detection POWER SW detection CS Function ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1E 1E 1E 1E 1E 1E 0005 0004 0005 0004 0006 0006 DATA Description BIT 4 "H" at M ovie 2 "H" at the setting 5 1 7 6 "L" at the ON time "L" at thedecrease "L" at the ON time "L" at the ON time

4-4-4 SUB MI-COM A/D Port


PIN 27 26 NAME Batt Info A/D Batt A/D Description Battery Temperature Detection Battery Voltage Detection CS Function ADDR 1 1 1E 1E 0001 0000 AD DATA (00 FF) Low High(FF) Low(00) High Low(00) High(FF)

10

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

4-4-5 BACK END MI-COM Input Port


PIN T3 T5 AV DET PANEL Open Switch NAME Description M ulti terminal connection detect LCD open detect CS Function ADDR 0 0 01 01 000B 000A DATA DESCRIPTION BIT 5 "H" at detect 2 "H" at the open

11

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5. Adjustment Procedures
5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement
After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows minimum required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.

NOTE)
(1) Before turning on power to the main unit, prepare the tools necessary for a series of adjustment steps and make setting as required. Thus, you can perform the adjustment items in succession without having to make preparation before each adjustment item. (2) After turning on power to the main unit, carry out the adjustment items in the order indicated in the Service Manual. Accomplish the adjustment items successively wherever possible. (3) Regarding item 5-5 "CCD Section (2)", determine a timing point of execution with priority given to the internal camera temperature (for details, refer to the description of internal camera temperature check). Note, however, that 5-6 "Camera Section" should be taken after carrying out item 5-5 "CCD Section (2)". (Item 5-5 may be carried out before items 5-3 and 5-4.)
: Adjustment required Camera system Part name No. Adjustment item Lens 5-2 CCD Section (1) (DC20 E only) 5-2-1 5-2-2 5-2-3 5-2-4 5-2-5 5-2-6 5-2-7 Internal Camera T emperature Check (1) Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment) Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (1) Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (2) Internal Camera T emperature Check (2) CCD Image Adjustment (Low T emperature) CCD Image Adjustment Result Check (Low T emperature) Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition GYRO PCB CCD MAIN PCB PCB Adjustment setting

5-3 AF Section 5-3-1 5-3-2 5-3-3 VCM Adjustment CZ Automatic Adjustment Cam Correction (AUT O) Product condition Product condition Product condition

5-4 IS Section 5-4-1 5-4-2 Gyro Offset Auto Adjustment Data Writing Product condition Product condition

5-5 CCD Section (2) (DC20 E only) 5-5-1 5-5-2 5-5-3 Internal Camera T emperature Check (3) CCD Image Adjustment (High T emperature) CCD Image Adjustment Result Check Product condition Product condition Product condition

12

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT


: Adjustment required Camera system Part name No. Adjustment item Lens 5-6 Camera Section 5-6-1 5-6-2 5-6-3 5-6-4 5-6-5 5-6-6 5-6-7 Iris Adjustment WB Adjustment (1) Color Balance Adjustment WB Adjustment (2) WB Adjustment (3) DAT A Writing CCD Pixel Missing Compensation Part name TS MAIN LCD mech PCB PCB chassis Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition GYRO PCB CCD MAIN PCB PCB Adjustment setting

Recorder system

No.

Adjustment item

Adjustment setting

5-7 Recorder Section 5-7-1 5-7-2 5-7-3 Playback error rate check Self-recording error rate check LCD PCB Setting Destination Product condition Product condition Product condition

13

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-2 CCD Section (1) - CCD Image Adjustment - (DC20 E only)


This camcorder is provided with a primary-color-filter CCD having 2,000,000 pixels. Since the number of CCD pixels is increased, two signal processing circuits are provided for the left-side and right-side imaging areas. For eliminating a level difference between signals on these two signal processing circuits, it is required to perform initial adjustment using a dedicated tool. The characteristics of the CCD (sensitivity, void/stuck pixels) largely depend on its temperature, and there are subtle differences in the CCD characteristics due to variations in production. Therefore, carry out CCD image adjustment twice in total, i.e., at low temperature (immediately after power-on) and at high temperature (in a lapse of certain time after power-on).

Note)
For CCD image adjustment of this camcorder, it is required to modify the CCD image adjusting tool DY9-1391-000 using the CCD image adjusting tool modification kit DY9-1404-000.

5-2-1 Internal Camera Temperature Check (1) Preparation)


(1) Connect the CCD image adjusting jig as shown in Fig. 11. (The LED light source should be removed until item 5-2-3.) In this video camera, turn the TAPE/DISC select switch to DISC position. (2) Before proceeding to adjustment, apply power to the CCD image adjusting tool for at least 15 minutes (in order to stabilize the light source).

MOUNT 27mm

CA-570

LED Light source CA-570 (Power supply for tool)

TAPE
R G B

DISC
Light source adjusting knobs Multi Cable Main unit Tool S Terminal

Fig. 11

14

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, check the internal temperature sensor in the camera. (Be sure to perform this step immediately after power-on.) (2) Using the internal camera temperature data, and record the current internal temperature. Temperature immediately after power-on T1 = ______________

Note)
(1) In cases where the procedure has been interrupted, the internal camera temperature data recorded will be usable as reference data at the time of restart.
ST EP PROCEDURE T EMPERAT URE CHECK 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 Press SLOW KEY for transition to the normal mode. MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 02 ST 00D0 08 RD Microcomputer operation Completion of internal camera temperature sensor check indication. Adjustment is completed. Indication of internal camera temperature

Internal camera temperature difference

Fig. 12

Internal camera temperature difference T [C] = (Current internal camera temperature) - (Internal camera temperature at CCD image adjustment (low temperature) The value of the internal camera temperature difference is represented in decimal notation. When the value is negative, it will blink. (The value does not blink if it is positive.) Changes in the internal camera temperature difference will cause the background color to change. As the internal temperature of the lens increases, the background color changes as follows: blinking in yellowwhite yellowgreen. Note: Until CCD image adjustment is carried out at a service center, a value of internal camera temperature difference is indicated according to the "Internal camera temperature at CCD image adjustment (low temperature)" data recorded at the time of pre-adjustment in the manufacturing process.

15

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment)


(1) Adjustment Conditions Movie/Still : Movie Shooting mode AF ZOOM Electronic zoom Image stabilizer CHART SPEC. Not required Automatic adjustment : Program AE : Closest MF focus : Telephoto-end : OFF : OFF

Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out iris adjustment (coarse adjustment).
ST EP PROCEDURE IRIS 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3000 00 RD 2 08 ST RD 3001 00 Microcomputer operation Iris adjustment. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Writing of iris adjustment data Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

ST Fig. 13

16

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-2-3 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (1)


For this adjustment, use the same conditions as those specified in 5-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment) SPEC. Manual adjustment

Preparation)
(1) On the CCD image adjusting tool, mount its light source part. Turn on power to the CCD image adjusting tool.

Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, adjust the light quantity of the CCD image adjusting tool.
ST EP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation MONIT OR PREPARAT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 7 ST 0000 01 2) Perform storing. RD 01 V synchronization set (press the PAUSE button.) (DT becomes 00 after storing.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 301A 01 2) Perform storing. RD T ool light intensity adjustment mode (press the PAUSE button.) 3 T urn the light intensity adjusting knob of the tool so that each of the R, G and B data shown in Figure 14 will be 8010. 4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 301A 00 2) Perform storing. RD Move to normal mode. (press the PAUSE button.)

Note)
If step 1 is not taken, the result of CCD image adjustment may become NG. To avoid this, be sure to carry out step 1.

Fig. 14

17

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-2-4 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (2)


For this adjustment, use the same conditions as those specified in 5-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment) (1) Be sure to take the correct sequence of procedural steps in CCD image adjustment. If you take any procedural step in an unspecified sequence or skip it over, normal adjustment will not be accomplished.

Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, check the light source of the CCD image adjusting tool.
ST EP PROCEDURE LIGHT SOURCE CHECK 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3011 -RD 2 08 ST RD 3012 - Microcomputer operation LED light source (LED RGB) check (1) Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 LED light source (LED Flatness) check (2) Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

18

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-2-5 Internal Camera Temperature Check (2)


For this adjustment, use the same conditions as those specified in 5-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment)

Procedure)
(1) Press the SLOW KEY, check the internal temperature sensor in the camera. (Within about five minutes, perform this step as soon as power is turned on.) (2) Record the current internal temperature. Temperature about five minutes after power-on T2 = _________ (3) Calculate an increase in the internal camera temperature [C], and check that it is less than 7 [C]. Increase in internal camera temperature [C] = T2 - T1 Example: Under the condition that T1 = -9 and T2 = -4, an increase in temperature is calculated as follows: T2 - T1 = - 4 - (-9) = 5 [C] (4) If an increase in the internal camera temperature exceeds 7C, turn power off and then wait until a temperature level of less than 7C is reached. Then, proceed to items 5-2-6 and subsequent. Note) Remember that power cannot be disconnected just by turning off the POWER switch. Be sure to release the service mode, and then turn off the POWER switch or unplug from the CA receptacle.

<Reference>

Internal camera temperature difference

Fig. 15 Internal camera temperature difference T [C] = (Current internal camera temperature) - (Internal camera temperature at CCD image adjustment (low temperature) A value of internal camera temperature difference is represented in decimal notation. When the value is negative, it is indicated in blinking form. (When the value is positive, it is indicated in steadily turned-on form.)

19

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-2-6 CCD Image Adjustment (Low Temperature)


For this adjustment, use the same conditions as those specified in 5-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment) SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)
(1) Carry out CCD image adjustment (low temperature) in the following procedure.
ST EP PROCEDURE CCD IMAGE ADJUST MENT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3013 -RD 2 08 ST RD 3014 - Microcomputer operation Image adjustment (low temperature) Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Adjustment data writing. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

20

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-2-7 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check (Low Temperature)


For this adjustment, use the same conditions as those specified in 5-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment) SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)
(1) Check and write the result data of CCD image adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE RESULT CHECK 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3017 -RD 2 2 08 08 ST RD ST RD 3018 3019 - - Microcomputer operation Color difference check Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Noise check Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Check result writing Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

Note)
If the result of any one of the above check steps is NG, carry out the adjustment procedures described in item 5-2 CCD Section (1) again from the beginning while maintaining the internal camera temperature within the allowable range. If NG is indicated repeatedly, replace the CCD PCB with a new one.

STATUS (ST)

ERROR No. TOTAL

CER

NER

Fig. 16

Note)
For details of the error codes, refer to p.30.

21

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-3 AF Section Adjustment


Note)
(1) The sections 5-3-2 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-3-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are performed independently, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained. Also, when section 5-3-2 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 5-3-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed immediately without elapse of time. If section 5-3-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after elapse of time upon completion of section 5-3-2 : CZ automatic adjustment, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.

Preparation)
(1) For AF section Adjustment, use the product state. (2) CZ adjustment and cam correction conditions (initial state) Movie/Still Shooting mode : Movie : Program AE

ZOOM : Telephoto-end CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 0.02 m from lens front Chart luminance Digital Zoom Auto slow shutter : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.) : OFF : OFF

22

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-3-1 VCM Adjustment


SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out VCM adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE Preparation for VCM adjustment 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3119 00 RD 2 08 ST 311A RD -AA Microcomputer operation

It will take a period of ten seconds OK with ST : 19 Correction value calculation. OK with ST : AA, NG with ST : FE

ST

Fig. 17

23

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-3-2 CZ Automatic Adjustment


CHART SPEC. CZ adjustment chart At STEP 3, ST : AA should be attained.

Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV. (2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode. (3) Perform the cam correction.
ST EP PROCEDURE CZ 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3110 00 RD 10 2 08 ST 3100 - Automatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG condition is encountered in automatic adjustment, check the parts inside the lens section. Adjustment is completed (ST =AA : OK). Perform the cam correction. Adjustment is completed (ST =FF : NG). T urn off the power then back on. T hen make readjustment. Microcomputer operation

Move to adjustment mode.

Judgement on result of adjustment

08

RD RD

3100

AA FF

5-3-3 Cam Correction (AUTO)


CHART SPEC. CZ adjustment chart Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Perform the cam correction by following the table below. (2) Quit the service mode, turn power off/on, and then check that proper focusing can be attained in normal zooming operation (AF OFF). (3) If the result is NG, perform 5-3-2 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-3-3 : Cam correction (AUTO).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation CAM CORRECT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3101 00 2) Perform storing. RD 01 (press the PAUSE button.) 2 Cancel the service mode, and set the zoom position to the telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped, turn OFF the AF function. 3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3202 00 WR 2) Perform storing. RD 02 Correction value measurement. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST :02. 4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3104 00 2) Perform storing. RD 04 Correction value calculation. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST :04. 5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3105 00 2) Perform storing. RD AA Completion of correction value writing. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST :AA.

24

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-4 IS Section Adjustment


Note)
(1) Perform the IS adjustment after machine is re-assembled to a product status. (2) Prepare a tripod or stable work bench. (3) Each of the adjustment data (5-4-1) becomes valid when 5-4-2 data writing is made. After completion of each adjustment, be sure to carry out 5-4-2 before turning power OFF.

5-4-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment


SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera. (2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.

Note)
It will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to complete adjustment (OK) after storing (pressing the pause button).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 320D 00 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Microcomputer operation ST 05 Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 After adjustment, data is indicated at IS3 and IS4.

B7 : Yaw Gyro gain B6 : Pitch Gyro gain 77 : Yaw Gyro offset 79 : Pitch Gyro offset

ST B7 B6 77 79 Fig. 18

25

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-4-2 Data Writing


SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (5-4-1) into the flash memory.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR DAT A WRIT ING CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 320F 00 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Microcomputer operation ST 05 Completion of DAT A writing. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

ST

Fig. 19

26

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-5 CCD Section (2) (DC20 E only)


5-5-1 Internal Camera Temperature Check (3)
(1) Adjustment Conditions Movie/Still : Movie Shotting mode AF ZOOM Electronic zoom Image stabilizer : Program AE : Closest focus : Telephoto-end : OFF : OFF

Preparation)
(1) For adjustment, provide the same tool and connections as in 5-2 CCD Section (1). (The LED light source should be removed until item 5-5-2.)

Procedure)
(1) Press the SLOW KEY, check the internal temperature sensor in the camera. (Perform this step about 20 to 50 minutes after power-on.) (2) Using the internal camera temperature data, calculate a value of the current internal temperature, and record the calculated value. Temperature 20 to 50 minutes after power-on T3 = ____________ (3) Calculate an increase in the internal camera temperature [C], and check that it is in the range of 15[C] to 20[C]. Increase in internal camera temperature [C] = (T2 - T1) + T3 (4) If an increase in the internal camera temperature exceeds 20C, turn power off and then wait until a temperature level of less than 20C is reached. Then, proceed to items 5-5-2 and subsequent. If an increase in the internal camera temperature is less than 15C, wait until a temperature level exceeding 15C is reached. Then, proceed to items 5-5-2 and subsequent.

<Reference>

Internal camera temperature difference

Fig. 20

Note)
The internal camera temperature check procedures are complete at this step. After checking the internal camera temperature difference, be sure to reset DATA to 00.
ST EP PROCEDURE T EMPERAT URE CHECK 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 Press SLOW KEY for transition to the normal mode. MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 02 ST 00D0 00 RD Microcomputer operation Release of internal camera temperature sensor check indication. Release is completed. Indication of internal camera temperature

27

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-5-2 CCD Image Adjustment (High Temperature)


For this adjustment, use the same conditions as those specified in 5-5-1 Internal Camera Temperature Check (3) SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)
(1) Carry out CCD image adjustment (high temperature) in the following procedure.
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 7 ST 0000 01 RD 01 2 2 08 08 ST RD ST RD 3015 3016 - - Microcomputer operation

V synchronization set (DT becomes 00 after storing.) Image adjustment (high temperature) Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Writing of adjustment data Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

Note)
If the knob adjusted in 5-2-3 has been turned, readjust it before proceeding to CCD image adjustment (high temperature). If step 1 is not taken, the result of CCD image adjustment may become NG. To avoid this, be sure to carry out step 1.

28

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-5-3 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check


For this adjustment, use the same conditions as those specified in 5-5-1 Internal Camera Temperature Check (3) SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)
(1) Check and write the result data of CCD image adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3017 -RD 2 2 08 08 ST RD ST RD 3018 3019 - - Microcomputer operation Color difference check Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Noise check Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Check result writing Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

Note)
If the result of any one of the above check steps is NG, carry out the adjustment procedures described in item 5-5 CCD Section (2) (DC20 E only) again from the beginning while maintaining the internal camera temperature within the allowable range. If NG is indicated repeatedly, replace the CCD PCB with a new one.

STATUS (ST)

ERROR No. TOTAL

CER

NER

Fig. 21

29

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

Error Code Table for CCD image Correction


Error No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A Error Conditions LED intensity low LED AE time out Lc3 dummy leak too large Lc3 dummy leak ch difference too large Not used Lc4 residual err too large Lc4 residual err ch difference too large Lc3/lc4 slope too large Gain correction ch difference too large Measure abort Error No 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 Not used Shading error (horizontal slope) RGB absolute value insufficient RGB absolute value is too large Chroma error between 2channels is too large Noise level difference between 2channels is too large time out range over Error Conditions RGB difference error

30

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-6 Camera Section Adjustment


Notes)
(1) Each adjustment data (5-6-1 to 5-6-5) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 5-6-6. If power must be turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 5-6-6. (2) Be sure to carry out adjustments 5-6-2 through 5-6-5 as sequenced in succession. Remember that satisfactory performance will not be attained by performing just one of these adjustments.

Preparation)
(1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition. (2) Adjustment condition (initial condition) Movie/Still Shooting mode AF Image stabilizer Chart AE IMAGE EFFECT : Movie : Program AE : OFF : OFF : Standard angle of view : P mode : OFF

5-6-1 Iris Adjustment


CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K) not required Automatic adjustment.

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris.
ST EP PROCEDURE IRIS 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) CS 2 MONIT OR Function MD ADDR DT 08 ST 3000 -WR RD Microcomputer operation

Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :00 (Others, NG)

ST

Fig. 22

31

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-6-2 WB Adjustment (1)


CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K) Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1). Note) In STEP5, color balance gain data is set to FF. Be sure to carry out color balance adjustment described in 56-3. In cases where the MAIN PCB has been replaced with a new one, it is not necessary to take the adjustment steps 1 to 4.
ST EP PROCEDURE WB (1) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 10 ST 1044 00 RD 2 2 2 2 10 10 10 08 ST RD ST RD ST RD 1045 1046 1047 00 00 00 - -Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (Others, NG) T arget value reset. Adjustment is completed. T arget value reset. Adjustment is completed. T arget value reset. Adjustment is completed. Microcomputer operation

T arget value reset. Adjustment is completed.

ST 3002 WR RD

5-6-3 Color Balance Adjustment


CHART SPEC. Lightbox (5600K), and color bar chart Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out automatic adjustment for color balance.
ST EP PROCEDURE WB (2) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) CS 2 MONIT OR Function MD ADDR DT 08 ST 3003 -WR RD Microcomputer operation

Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

32

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-6-4 WB Adjustment (2)


CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K), and CCA12 filter Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (2).
ST EP PROCEDURE WB (2) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3004 -WR RD Microcomputer operation

Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

5-6-5 WB Adjustment (3)


CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K) Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (3).
ST EP PROCEDURE WB (3) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3005 -WR RD Microcomputer operation

Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

5-6-6 Data Writing


SPEC. Data writing

Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (5-6-1 to 5-6-5) into the Flash.
ST EP PROCEDURE EEPROM WRIT ING 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3006 00 RD - Microcomputer operation

Completion of Flash writing. Completion with ST :05, (NG with ST :09)

33

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-6-7 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation Note)


(1) If more than the above number are detected in adjustment, the result of adjustment is indicated as NG and the correction is not performed. Further, if three consecutive missing pixels in a row are detected, the correction is not performed either. (2) The number of white dot increases with the temperature of the CCD, causing a change in detectable level. If the adjustment is performed after a lapse of time longer than the specified period of power-on, the temperature of the CCD becomes higher than a preset temperature level to result in an increase in the number of white dots detected. In this situation, CCD Pixel Missing Compensation cannot be made properly. (3) In addition to the CCD Pixel Missing Compensation function mentioned above, this product is provided with a function for automatically correcting pixel missing points each time power is turned on and a function for automatically correcting pixel missing points at the time of shooting at a dark object (interlinked with AGC level adjustment). CHART SPEC. Not required Automatic writing

Preparation)
(1) Carry out compensation for CCD pixel missing in the product state. (2) Adjustment condition Shooting mode AF ZOOM Demo mode Image stabilizer : Program AE : OFF (Focus short range) : Telephoto-end : OFF : OFF

Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out CCD Pixel Missing Compensation. (Perform this step about 20 to 60 minutes after power-on. For the DC20 E, be sure to conduct the CCD Pixel Missing Compensation after CCD image adjustment has been made.) (2) If the result of adjustment is NG (status 09), refer to the error code table shown below. Furthermore, by observing an actual image, check for stuck/void pixels. Then, judge whether the result of adjustment is OK or NG. (In the case of NG, replace the CCD PCB with a new one.)
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 300E -RD 2 08 ST RD 300F - Microcomputer operation Blemish detected Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Blemish detection data writing Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09

34

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

STATUS CODE (ST)

Total of white dots

ERROR No

Fig. 23

Error Code Table for CCD Pixel Missing Compensation (DC20 E)


In the DC20 E, if a pixel missing is found on the CCD pixels, it is required to scan each of the RG and GB images. Therefore, white dot detection is performed twice, and the result of the detection is indicated on a bit basis.
Error No 00 10 20 40 80 Normal end T he number of white dots has exceeded the upper limit in the first time of detection T he number of white dots has exceeded the upper limit in the second time of detection T he total number of white dots in the first time and second time of detection has exceeded the upper limit In white dot detection, three consecutive missing pixels in a row are detected. Error Conditions

35

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-7 Recorder Section Adjustment


Preparation)
(1) Carry out setup/check in the product state.

5-7-1 Playback error rate check


MODE SPEC. Playing back DVD-R Reference disc PAL (DY9-1408-000) Error rate 3.3 10-3 or less

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the reference disc, carry out error rate check referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE SWP (AUT O) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 05 ST 0001 01 WR RD 00 Microcomputer operation

Error rate indication.

Note)
* It takes 7 to 20 seconds to indicate an error rate, because it is calculated from large amount of data. * To measure an error rate again, it is once required to stop the playback. If the result of the error rate check is NG, perform recheck according to 2-3-1 Flowchart for Playback Image Error Check in Service Hint.

Error rate indication

Fig. 24

36

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-7-2 Self-recording error rate check


MODE SPEC. Playing back the self-recording DVD-RW Error rate 8.0 10-3 or less

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the self-recording DVD-RW disc, carry out error rate check referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE C.FG(AUT O) 1 1) Recording for a period of approx. 10 to 30 sec. 2 1) Playing back the part recorded in ST EP 1. 3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT Microcomputer operation

05

ST 0001 WR RD

01 00 Error rate indication.

Note)
(1) For self-recording error rate measurement, use a 8-cm DVD-RW disc manufactured by Maxell. (2) Select the video recording mode. (3) In principle, the same conditions are provided in use of any recording mode for error rate measurement. It is however advisable to select the SP mode.

Note)
* It takes 7 to 20 seconds to indicate an error rate, because it is calculated from large amount of data. * To measure an error rate again, it is once required to stop the playback. If the result of the error rate check is NG, perform recheck according to 2-3-1 Flowchart for Playback Image Error Check in Service Hint.

Error rate indication

Fig. 25

5-7-3 LCD PCB Setting Destination


When mounting the LCD PCB of service part, perform the following adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Add "09" to the current value, and store the result data. Microcomputer operation MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 20 ST 0003 -RD ADJ

37

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-8 CVF Adjustment


For this camcorder, CVF adjustment is optional. However, if malfunction is found in CVF image, picture quality or color after replacement of a CVF-related part, be sure to carry out the following adjustment.

Note)
(1) The adjustments from 5-8-3 through 5-8-5 must be carried out in sequence. Remember that Satisfactory performance will not be attained unless all adjustments are performed.

Preparation)
(1) Carry out CVF adjustment in the camera mode in the product condition.

5-8-1 Forced CVF ON, Adjustment Image (B/W) Setting Procedure)


(1) Referring to the table shown below, make the setting.
ST EP Forced CVF ON PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) Black and white image 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 2 08 ST RD 330F - Completion of setting MONIT OR CS 0 Function 00 MD ST RD ADDR 0004 DT 02 Adjustment points and range Start of setting Completion of setting

5-8-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment


M. EQ. TP. SPEC. Frequency counter Extension connector - pin 4 (EVF HD) 15.734 0.1kHz

Procedure)
(1) Carry out adjustment according to the table shown below. Note) When the following adjustment is in progress (MD: ST), the LCD and CVF images are not synchronized, but it is not malfunction.
ST EP CVF Frequency Adjustment PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS 0 Function 21 MD ST RD ADDR DT Adjustment points and range

0003 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting

38

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-8-3 COM-DC Level Adjustment


MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Display of monochrome master Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 18 (EVF COM DC) / TP signal (self TRIG) 2.30 0.05 [V] (DC. P-P center of EVF COM to GND level)

Procedure)
(1) Carry out adjustment according to the table shown below.

2.30V 0.05V

Fig. 26

ST EP COM-DC Level Ajustment

PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)

MONIT OR CS 0 Function 21 MD ST RD ADDR DT

Microcomputer operation

0004 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting

39

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-8-4 COM Amplitude Adjustment


MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Display of monochrome master Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 14 (EVF COM AC) / TP signal (self TRIG) 4.00 0.05 [V]

Procedure)
(1) Carry out adjustment according to the table shown below.

4.00V 0.05V

Fig. 27
MONIT OR CS 0 Function 21 MD ST RD ADDR DT

ST EP COM Amplitude Adjustment

PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)

Microcomputer operation

000C "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting

40

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-8-5 Brightness Adjustment


MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Display of monochrome master Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 15 (G), pin 13 (R), pin 16 (B), / TP signal (self TRIG) 2.80 0.05 [V]

Procedure)
(1) Carry out adjustment according to the table shown below. (2) After adjustment, make sure the contrast adjustment performed in 5-8-6 is not deteriorated. If deteriorated, repeatedly carry out the contrast adjustment in 5-8-6 and brightness adjustment in 5-8-5. Note) In the service mode, the waveform observation point is hard to locate. For locating the waveform observation point, transfer to the normal mode beforehand.
2.80V 0.05V

Service Mode

Fig. 28
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR CS 0 0 0 Function 21 21 21 MD ST RD ST RD ST RD ADDR DT Microcomputer operation

Brightness Adjustment (G) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) Brightness Adjustment (R) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) Brightness Adjustment (B) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)

0006 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting 0008 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting 000A "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting

Note) The adjustment sequence is important. Be sure to adjust (G) first, and then (R) and (B).

41

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-8-6 Contrast Adjustment


MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Display of monochrome master Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 15 (G), pin 13 (R), pin 16 (B), / TP signal (self TRIG) 2.30 0.05 [V]

Procedure)
(1) Carry out adjustment according to the table shown below. Note) In the service mode, the waveform observation point is hard to locate. For locating the waveform observation point, transfer to the normal mode beforehand.

Service Mode

2.30V 0.05V

Normal Mode

2.30V 0.05V

Fig. 29
MONIT OR CS 0 0 0 Function 21 21 21 MD ST RD ST RD ST RD ADDR DT

ST EP Contrast Adjustment (G)

PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)

Microcomputer operation

0007 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting 0009 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting 000B "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting

Contrast Adjustment (R)

1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)

Contrast Adjustment (B)

1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)

Note) The adjustment sequence indicated above should be observed. If the ST mode has been selected at the time of contrast adjustment, the black limiter is released automatically. Therefore, it is not required to make setting in this case. Be sure to perform adjustment (G) first, and then adjustments (R) and (B).

42

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

5-8-7 Release of Forced CVF ON Procedure)


(1) Referring to the table shown below, make the setting.
ST EP Release of Forced CVF ON PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS 0 Function 00 MD ST RD ADDR 0004 DT 00 Microcomputer operation Start of setting Completion of setting

Note) The monochrome image display mode can be reset by turning power off/on.

43

SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. Service Hints -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-2 Location of Main Elements ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-3 Current Consumption Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 2. Troubleshooting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 2-1 Power Supply Malfunction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 2-2 Camera Picture Malfunction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7 2-3 Malfunction of Playback Picture ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 2-3-1 Flow Chart for Checking Malfunction of Playback Picture ------------------------------------------------------------- 8 2-3-2 Checking Method -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 2-4 Cautions on Handling TS Mech Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12 2-5 Periodic Checkup and Maintenance of TS Mech Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 2-5-1 Cleaning of Pickup Lens --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 2-6 Cleaning Inside of CVF Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 2-7 Disposing of the Lithium Battery ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 2-7-1 How to Remove the Built-in Lithium Battery when Discarding the Video Camera ------------------------------- 18 2-8 Warning Displays ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

1. Service Hints
1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards
The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.

CVF PCB AV FPC ASS'Y SWITCH FPC ASS'Y ZOOM ASS'Y DC JACK PCB REAR KEY FPC ASS'Y SUB PCB USB FPC ASS'Y

CARD PCB

CAPACITOR PCB FLASH PCB

GYRO PCB MAIN PCB CCD PCB

LCD HINGE PCB LCD PCB

Fig. 1 Note) FLASH PCB and CAPACITOR PCB are only for DC20 E.

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

1-2 Location of Main Elements MAIN PCB DC20 E


IC1200 LENS DRIVER IC1000 CDS/AD IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

IC2304 DDR SDRAM

IC2305 DDR SDRAM

IC810 AUDIO PLL

IC2300 BACK END

IC2302 BUFFER FU3203

FU3200 FU3205

FU1800 FU3202 IC1650 SHOCK SENSOR IC1651 SENSOR IC IC100 SUB MI-COM IC1400 LAP IC3203 4.6V REGULATOR IC101 CCM MI-COM IC3200 3.1V REGULATOR IC103 FLASH IC106 AND GATE IC3500 USB IC IC2301 SRAM IC1401 1.8V REGULATOR IC2303 FLASH for DC20 E only IC1001 TG FU3204 FU3201

IC104 3.2V REGULATOR IC105 RESET IC

IC1002 MPX2 IC2306 DDR SDRAM IC2102 75OHM DRIVER IC1103 DIGIC DV

IC1102 SDRAM IC1101 SDRAM

Fig. 2

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

MAIN PCB DC10 E


IC1001 INVERTER IC1004 2.8V REGULATOR IC1002 TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL IC1200 LENS DRIVER

IC2304 DDR SDRAM

IC2305 DDR SDRAM

IC810 AUDIO PLL

IC2300 BACK END

IC2302 BUFFER FU3203

FU3205

FU1800 FU3202 FU3204 FU3201 IC1650 SHOCK SENSOR IC1651 SENSOR IC IC100 SUB MI-COM IC1400 LAP IC3203 4.6V REGULATOR IC101 CCM MI-COM IC103 FLASH IC106 AND GATE IC3500 USB IC IC2301 SRAM IC1401 1.8V REGULATOR IC2303 FLASH for DC10 E only

IC104 3.2V REGULATOR IC105 RESET IC IC2306 DDR SDRAM IC2102 75OHM DRIVER

IC1102 SDRAM IC1101 SDRAM

Fig. 3

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

SUB PCB
IC1502 2.8V REGULATOR IC1501 CVF DRIVER IC801 AIF 4

LCD PCB

GYRO PCB
IC1604 Y SENSOR GYRO

IC903 2.8V REGULATOR

IC1603 P SENSOR GYRO IC901 EEPROM IC902 LCD DRIVER

CCD PCB

DC20 E
IC1054 CCD IC1072 BUFFER

DC10 E
IC1071 BUFFER IC1070 CCD

IC1050 IC1053 INVERTER INVERTER

IC1051 INVERTER IC1055 OPE AMP

IC1052 INVERTER

FLASH PCB DC20 E

IC501 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

Fig. 4

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

1-3 Current Consumption Check


The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status. Measurement condition : Product status, DVD-RW (Video mode), recording mode : XP, camera auto mode (AF OFF), LCD ON (Approx. 0.03A each smaller in the case of CVF) Preset voltage : 7.4V

DC10 E
POWER SW CAMERA MODE REC PAUSE REC PLAY PLAY (DISC) PLAY (CARD) POWER OFF Current consumption (A) 0.47 0.84 0.71 0.40 0.79 (mA)

DC20 E
POWER SW CAMERA MODE REC PAUSE REC PLAY PLAY (DISC) PLAY (CARD) POWER OFF Current consumption (A) 0.55 0.93 0.76 0.45 0.71 (mA)

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2. Troubleshooting
To detect the defective parts for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.

2-1 Power Supply Malfunction


<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences. Main power is connected. UNREG is supplied to the MAIN PCB SUB MI-COM starts up. CCM MI-COM starts up. SUB MI-COM outputs VCR ON H signal. PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. Establishes communication with the BACK END The CCM MI-COM is brought into standby status with the VCR ON changed to VCR Low. After that, the power supply is turned ON by the following procedures. Power supply mode switch operation After received by MODE MI-COM, VCR ON H is output. The PWM driver is starts to turns on various power supplies. The MI-COM in the BACK END is started up to control the system.

<Check Points>
1) 2) Key Input Check the key input at Power Switch in service mode. Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer will be displayed in service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty. Fuses on the power supply PCB Check the continuity of the fuses FU3200, 3201, 3202, 3203, 3204, 3205 and 1800 on the MAIN PCB. If NG, replace the fuse and check the power consumption. (FU3200 is for DC20 E only.) 4) Replace the MAIN PCB with a service part and check the operation.

3)

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2-2 Camera Picture Malfunction


<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below. CCD CCD PCB MAIN PCB (DIGIC DV) FRONT END AV FPC ASSY

<Check Points>
1) 2) 3) Check lens reset (SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT P.9) If no camera picture appears, check in service mode if the lens has been reset. If NG, check the lens. Check index screen display If the index screen is confirmed, the signal lines after FRONT END are considered to be OK. Check of DIGIC DV generation signal (white 100% or color bar) (SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT P.8) The white 100% or color bar signals are generated by the DIGIC DV on the MAIN PCB. In service mode, if the output of the white 100% or color bar signal is attained, the signal lines after DIGIC DV are considered to be OK. Check by commands particular to camera (SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT P.8) Check the operation of White balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in service mode.

4)

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2-3 Malfunction of Playback Picture


2-3-1 Flow Chart for Checking Malfunction of Playback Picture

START

Preparation for check

Is reference disc visual check OK?

NO

Wipe the recording surface with cloth.

Replace the disc.

YES Playback system check


Error rate 3.310 ?

YES

Is visual check OK?

NO

NO

YES
Playback after self-recording

Perform the cleaning of pickup lens (1) using air blower.

YES
Error rate 810 ?

NO

Error rate OK?

NO
Perform the cleaning of pickup lens (1) using air blower. Perform the cleaning of pickup lens (2) using alcohol and lens-cleaning paper.

YES

Recording/ playback system check

YES
Error rate OK?

YES

Error rate OK?

NO
Perform the cleaning of pickup lens (2) using alcohol and lens-cleaning paper.

NO

Replace the disc.

YES

Error rate OK?

YES

Error rate OK?

NO END

NO

Replace the TS Mech.

Fig. 5

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2-3-2 Checking Method <Hints>


In the DVD, degradation of picture quality normally appears on the screen as block noise, as in the DV. This is because, if an error occurs exceeding the ability of the error correction circuit, the block by block information of pictures is not played back properly and thus complemented by the previous picture information. Normally, such block noise appears on the screen when the error rate has considerably been degraded due to the contaminated disc or flaws, etc. Be sure to check the playback picture quality by the error rate.

<Check Points>
(1) Visual check of reference disc Check the recording surface of the reference disc for contamination or flaws. If the recording surface is contaminated, softly wipe the disc outward from its center using soft cloth. * The reference disc is a DVD-R disc of 8 cm, and classified as NTSC or PAL specification. For NTSC specification, use DY9-1407-000. The reference disc can be used, not only for checking an error rate, but also for checking the playback picture on the monitor, because it also contains video images (4:3, 16:9). * On the unit with different TV system, the reference disc cannot recognize the disc. This means that it cannot be used for checking an error rate.

For NTSC

DY9-1407-000

For PAL

DY9-1408-000

Fig. 6 (2) Playback error rate check (SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT, p.36) While the reference disc is played back, check error rate in the service mode. Playback position: Three positions: Inner, center and outer positions. By changing the disc chapter, the playback position can be changed.(*) Error rate standard : 3.3 10-3 In the case of NG, execute the steps from 1) shown below. * Relationships between playback position and chapter On the reference disc, data is recorded from the inner circumference to the outer circumference. Example : In the case of a reference disc with scenes 1 to 8
Playback position
Scene

Inner circumference
1

Outer circumference
8

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS (3) Self-recording error rate check (SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMETN, P. 37) Using a new DVD-RW disk (Commercially available), check an error rate during self-recording playback. Disc to be used Recording mode Recording mode Recording time : Hitachis Maxell DVD-RW of 8 cm (If the procurement is difficult in an oversea location, SONYs DVD-RW of 8 cm is allowed to be used.) : VIDEO mode : SP mode (Recommendation) : Approx. 10 to 30 sec.

Recording position : Not specifically designated. Write the record as a postscript without initializing. Specified range of error rate : 8.0 10-3 1) Cleaning of pickup lens (1) Open the Disc Cover and clean the pickup lens surface with a an air blower that is commercially available. After cleaning, check the error rate again. * Do not use an air blower of spray-can type because blowing power is too strong. * Do not touch the lens with bare hand. 2) Cleaning of pickup lens (2) If an error rate is out of the specified range, clean the pickup lens surface using Lens-cleaning paper and alcohol. Using forceps whose ends are wound with lens-cleaning paper that is wet with alcohol, wipe the lens surface by moving the forceps once in a single direction. After cleaning, check the error rate again. * Be sure to use ethyl alcohol (commercially available product). Never use other solvents. * If you have spilled alcohol by mistake onto the cover, do not rub it for removal as its coating will come off. For cleaning the surface of the cover, wipe it with a dry cloth without using alcohol. Outline Description of Pickup Unit Suspension Do not touch it directly to prevent it from being deformed.

Coil wiring material Wipe once Magnet

Lens-cleaning paper

Material of lens protection Do not rub it strong to prevent it from coming off.

Tweezers Cover Lens-cleaning paper may catch on the edge section. Coil wiring material

Magnet

Do not use forceps made of magnetic material. Otherwise, the magnet may attract the tweezers to cause the suspension to be deformed or the lens to be damaged.

Coil wiring material Lens-cleaning paper may catch on the edge section.

Suspension Do not touch it directly to prevent it from being deformed. Fig. 7

10

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS 3) Replacement with another reference disc If an error rate is out of the specified range, replace the reference disc with another one. After replacement, check the error rate again. * In some cases, an error rate may appear in a worse state than the actual state depending on the conditions (lot and recording surface condition) of the disk used. 4) Replacement of TS Mech unit If an error rate is out of the specified range, replace the TS Mech unit.

11

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2-4 Cautions on Handling TS Mech Unit


<Hints>
The TS mech unit is of a precision design. When handling it, exercise extreme care, with the full understanding of the following points.

<Check Points>
(1) Cautions on handling The Disc Cover cannot be opened unless the power for the main unit is turned on. Avoid trying to open the cover forcibly. First turn on the power and then open the Disc Cover. It may require a longer time to take out the TS Mech depending on the disc condition and its recorded contents. (2) Caution for antistatic protection Since the TS mech unit contains a control circuit board, wear a static dissipative wrist band (commercially available) for antistatic protection. (3) Cautions about laser beam The laser beam is emitted in the TS Mech. If the laser beam gets in your eyes, it could cause eye damage, so never disassemble the TS Mech. This product's laser beam condenses light using an objective lens in the light pick up, so that it strikes a focal point on the disk's recording surface. Therefore, make sure that your eyes are at least 30 cm away from the objective lens when the laser diode is emitting light. Note : In complete products, the laser beam is not normally emitted when the Disc Cover is open. The laser beam is emitted when the two open/closed detection sensors near the Disc Cover are set to closed or when the Disc Cover on a disassembled product is closed and the operation of the TS Mech is being checked. (4) How to take up the service parts Since the white flexible cable bulges out of the control P.C.B., holding the left side of the TS Mech by hand means holding the flexible cable by hand. In this way, the flexible cable may be excessively loaded to result in its wire breakage. Thus, when taking out the TS Mech from the container, never hold its left side, but hold its right side, as shown in the figures below. (Fig. 8) Caution: If the flexible cable is broken, it is required to replace the entire TS Mech unit, because there is no replacement part for the flexible cable alone.

Right way to take out the TS Mech (First lift up its right side, and then take up the TS Mech by holding its upper and lower sections.)

Wrong way to take out the TS Mech

Fig. 8

12

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS (5) How to hold the TS Mech As instructed in step (2) above, do not hold the left section, that is, the flexible cable, of the TS Mech, but hold the upper and lower sections. (Fig. 9)

Right way to hold the TS Mech

Wrong way to hold the TS Mech Do not hold the section circled in red, that is, the flexible cable.
Fig. 9

(6) How to place the TS Mech Be sure to place the detached TS Mech with its pickup lens upward. At this time, do not leave the TS Mech for a long time without covering its lens. Store it with its lens covered. (7) Cautions on containing the TS Mech into the service parts box Both the upper and lower halves of the black container for service parts have antistatic effect. Thus place the TS Mech in the container as it is, without covering it. Caution: Do not put the TS Mech in a vinyl bag before placing it in the container. Or the vinyl bag may touch and cause damage to the pickup during transportation. The upper and lower halves of the container can fix the pickup position without touching the pickup directly.

13

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS (8) How to move the pickup from the inner circumference to the outer circumference

<Hints>
The TS Mech has two different pickup (hereinafter referred to as PU) positions: the PU stop position after the power for the main unit is turned off and the PU fixed position on the service parts. The former has its PU stopped on the inner circumference, and the latter has its PU stopped on the outer circumference. Thus when placing the TS Mech detached form the product in the container for transportation, it is required to move the PU stop position from the inner circumference to the outer circumference manually.

The condition of TS Mech Pickup positioned at inner /outer circumference PU stopped at inner circumference (At main unit power OFF with Disc Cover open) PU stopped at the outer circumference (Packed in the service part container)

Fig. 10

<Check Points>
1) Tool Reauired Tweezers made of non-magnetic material whose ends are not sharp, or a bar-like article (made of plastic or wood) 2) Moving method Slowly push the section shown in the figure (orange-colored section) outward. Pushing the other section may damage the pickup section. When the pickup has reached the outer circumference, do not keep on pressing further.

14

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS (9) How to eject the disc if the Disc Cover cannot be opened (forced opening) 1) Insert tweezers into the part A, and disengage the claw on the upper side of the Center Cover Lid. Then, remove the Center Cover Lid. (See Figure 11.) Note : Since the Center Cover Lid is not to be reused, you may damage the cover or break its claw. Take care, however, not to damage the R Upper Cover and the Center Cover located around it.

Fig. 11 2) Remove the R Upper Cover, R-LCD Unit, Front Cover Unit, Rear Cover Unit, CVF Unit, Camera Unit, and Center Cover. 3) The pin for opening the Disc Cover will appear. Open the Disc Cover by sliding the pin to the open position.

Pin

Fig. 12

15

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2-5 Periodic Checkup and Maintenance of TS Mech Unit


Be sure to carry out the following maintenance and periodic inspection for ensuring full functional performance of the TS Mech unit. After repairing the mech unit, it is advisable to perform the cleaning of the pickup lens regardless of how long the unit has been used.

2-5-1 Cleaning of Pickup Lens


Open the Disc Cover and clean the pickup lens surface with an air blower commercially available. * Do not use an air blower of spray-can type because blowing power is too strong. * Do not touch the lens with bare hand. * Do not perform the cleaning using lens-cleaning paper and alcohol for normal maintenance and checkup.

Pickup Lens

Fig. 13

16

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2-6 Cleaning Inside of CVF Unit


<Hints>
The Dust Cover for the CVF Unit cannot be seen from the outside of the camera. For cleaning the inside of the CVF Unit, it is therefore required to remove its screws. After completion of repair, it is advisable to clean the inside of the CVF Unit regardless of the length of cumulative use time of the camera.

<Procedure>
(1) Remove the R Upper Cover, R-LCD Unit, and Rear Cover Unit. (2) Using tweezers, detach the CVF Dust Cover. (3) Clean the inside of the CVF Unit.

CVF Dust Cover

Tweezers

Fig. 14

17

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2-7 Disposing of the Lithium Battery


When disposing this product, take out the internal lithium battery as follows. Regarding the disposal of the lithium battery, be sure to follow the industrial waste treatment regulations in your country. 2-7-1 How to Remove the Built-in Lithium Battery when Discarding the Video Camera
When discarding a video camera, remove the built-in lithium battery. Since there is a high-voltage generating section in the main unit, the work should be carried out after the power for the main unit has been left OFF for one and half months. Since there is danger of electrical shock from the DC20 E, read through the cautions in the procedure.

<Procedure>
1. Remove all the screws shown in the illustrations with a screwdriver. * The Cover (Center Cover Lid) is removed with tweezers. [P15 (9) -1)]

<Left side>

<Top side>

<Bottom side>

Fig. 15

18

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS 2-1. Remove the top cover 2-2. Remove the additional screws under it.

<Left side>

Fig. 16 3-1. Remove the LCD display cover and the back cover. * Detach the cable connectors with a pair of long-nosed pliers or simply cut them with a pair of scissors. 3-2. Being careful not to touch the part indicated in the illustration remove the additional screws.

<Left side>

Do not touch the condenser!

DC20 E

Touching the condenser can present a serious risk of electrical shock.

Fig. 17 4-1. Grab the battery firmly with an insulated pair of pliers or a similar tool and twist it repeatedly to detach it from the board (CARD PCB). 4-2. Be careful not to touch the part indicated in the illustration.

<Left side>
Do not touch the condenser!

DC20 E

Touching the condenser can present a serious risk of electrical shock.

Fig. 18

19

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

2-8 Warning Displays

TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH CANNOT RECORD


The temperature is too high.

TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH CANNOT REMOVE DISC


When trying to remove the disc when the temperature was too high.

CANNOT RECORD
When an error occurred on the disc, and recording cannot be performed.

REACHED THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SCENES


When trying to shoot or perform another operation increasing the number of titles or chapters after the maximum has already been reached.

DISC FULL
The disc has no free space, and movies and still images cannot be recorded.

CANNOT PLAY DISC


When trying to play an incompatible disc in the player.

CANNOT EDIT DISC


When trying to edit an unrecorded disc.

DISC IS FINALIZED
When trying to finalize a disc that is already finalized.

DISC IS FINALIZED

CANNOT RECORD

When trying to record to a finalized disc.

UNFINALIZE THE DISC


When trying to copy with PC when a finalized disc was recognized by DVD-Video.

UNABLE TO RECOVER DATA


When corrupted data cannot be recovered.

UNABLE TO RECOVER DATA


When corrupted data cannot be recovered.

FORMAT THE DISC

DISC IS PROTECTED
When trying to record to a write-protected disc.

20

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

DISC ERROR
When a disc cannot be recognized.

ACCESS ERROR
When an error occurred during reading process.

DISC COVER IS OPEN


When the disc cover is open

NO DISC
When no disc is loaded.

NO CARD
When no card is loaded.

LOADING THE DISC


Loading

DISC ERROR
When an error occurred in the disc and recording cannot be performed.

OPENING THE DISC COVER


Eject operation

COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED


When trying to record external input images recorded with copyright protection information to a card.

SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME


When the power has been turned on without setting the time zone and/or date and time.

CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK


When the battery charge level has dropped.

CARD ERROR
When an error occurred in the card and recording cannot be performed.

CARD FULL
When the available space on the card is low.

NAMING ERROR
When the file number and directory number have reached the maximum.

21

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE
When you tried to play an unplayable image type, incompatible JPEG image, or image with corrupted data.

PRINT ORDER ERROR


When there are too many print marks (100 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited.

NO CARD
When the card is not inserted in the socket of the main unit.

NO IMAGES
When the image that should be played in the card cannot be found.

IN CARD POSITION
When pressing the Start/Stop button in Camera mode.

THIS IMAGE CANNOT BE RECORDED


When analog input video that you are trying to record to a card cannot be recorded due to the signal condition.

PAPER ERROR
When a paper error occurs.

NO PARER
When the paper has not been inserted into the printer properly or there is no paper in the printer.

PAPER JAM
When a paper jam occurs during printing.

NO INK
When ink does not adhere properly or the ink has run out.

LOW INKLEVEL
When the ink level is low.

WASTE TANK FULL


When the waste ink tank is full.

CANNOT PRINT!
When you tried to print a different type of still image or one recorded by another device, or a still image imported to and edited on a computer.

COULD NOT PRINT * IMAGES


When you tried to print a different type of still image or one recorded by another device, or a still image imported to and edited on a computer using the DPOF setting for * images.

22

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

SET PRINT ORDER


When you tried to print still images not designated for printing by using the Print command in the Card Playback menu.

CANNOT TRIM
When you tried to trim still images with an image size of 160 120. Or, when you tried to trim a video where the aspect ratio deviates significantly from 4:3.

READJUST TRIMMING
When you tried to change the STYLE setting after making the trimming settings.

PRINTER ERROR
When a problem occurs in the printer.

COMMUNICATION ERROR
When an error has occurred during communication.

PRINTER IN USE
When the printer is in use. Check the printer status.

PRINTER WARMING UP
When the printer is warming up.

PAPER LEVER ERROR


When the printer paper lever is in the improper position.

PRINTER COVER OPEN


When the printer cover is open.

INCOMPATIBLE PAPER SIZE


When an unavailable paper size was selected in the paper size menu after displaying the paper size menu and changing the settings at the printer side.

CHECK PRINT SETTINGS


When the printer setting status displays the current recording value and the PRINT/SHARE button was pressed even though this value cannot be used by PictBridge when the printer is connected.

PRINT ERROR
When an error due to some unspecified cause occurred in the printer.

TRANS ORDER ERROR


When the image quantity that can be set was exceeded.

23

DC10 E, DC20 E SERVICE HINTS

TOO MANY STILL IMAGES DISCONNECT CABLE


Disconnect the USB cable, delete the still images from the memory card until there are 1800 or less, and then reconnect the USB cable.

CANNOT TRANSFER!
When PC Background is set, and then video is displayed (Setting icon and icon to its right are grayed out, and the PRINT/ SHARE button lights up), and the PRINT/SHARE button is pressed.

PAPER HAS BEEN CHANGED


When the paper size was changed between the time of selecting the paper and starting printing.

MEDIA TYPE ERROR


When a paper that cannot be used is selected.

INCOMPATIBLE PAPER SIZE


When paper that is incompatible with this device was loaded into the printer.

RECHARGE THE PRINTER BATTERY


When the printer battery is out of power.

PAPER AND INK DO NOT MATCH


When the ink cannot be used on the designated paper.

INK CASSETTE ERROR


When an error has occurred in the ink cassette.

OPERATION CANCELED
Duaring one-touch dubbing(disc copy) : When the operation was canceled the from the computer

24

BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM BLOCK DIAGRAMS CAMERA SECTION-1 (DC10 A,DC10 E,DM-DC10 ONLY) CAMERA SECTION-1 (DC20 A,DC20 E,DM-DC20 ONLY) CAMERA SECTION-2 CAMERA SECTION-3 CAMERA SECTION-4 CAMERA SECTION-5 CAMERA SECTION-6 SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION POWER SUPPLY SECTION FLASH PCB SECTION (DC20 A,DC20 E,DM-DC20 ONLY) LCD PCB SECTION CARD/LI, DC JACK PCB SECTION FPC SECTION

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
CCD PCB CCD PCB

DC10 E,DC20 E
IC1070 IC1072 IC1071

LENS UNIT

TEMP SENS ZOOM SENS ZOOM MOTOR IC1050

IC1054 IC1053

IC1051 IC1052

DC10 A DC10 E DM-DC10 ONLY

LCD
5P
6P

20P
1 CN4102 CN4101 2 22 1 23 20

LCD UNIT
CVF PCB

5 1 CN1601 IC1604

AE FPC ASS'Y
20P

IC1055

23P

IC1603

LCD
FOCUS MOTOR A16 FOCUS SENS IG METER 25P CN1052 A1 B1 B16 32P A10 CN1070 A1 B10 B1 20P 24P

GYRO PCB AV FPC ASS'Y CARD PCB


10P
1 17 2 CN50 16

17P

CAPACITOR PCB

DC20 A,DC20 E,DM-DC20 ONLY


CN501 CN502 1 2

CN51

FLASH PCB
IC501

mini SD CARD

6P

MICRO PHONE RELAY FPC

2P 12P

2P 1 12 CN500

BACK LIGHT LCD HINGE PCB


2P

2P CN899 1 6

2P

23 1 CN1501 22 2 23P

6P 3P 6P CN701 1 6 6P

SUB PCB
1 2 CN801 2P IC1502

IC801

LCD HINGE ASS'Y


IC1501 23P

2P

1 2 CN903

LCD PCB
23

A1 B1

CN2905

60P

23P

23P

CN902 CN901 1 IC902 24 24P

MIC ASS'Y

FLASH ASS'Y

2P

A30 B30 IC901

FRONT FPC
6
CN107

6 1

1 CN107

SPEAKER
5P
12
CN100

6P

12P

5 CN1201 1

12

CN100

C 10 N210

10 P

12P

10

CN

2 10

IC1650 IC1001 IC1004 IC1002 IC104 20P IC105 IC3201 IC1651

0 1

5 CN1201 1

IC1001 IC1650 IC1000 IC104 IC1651

0 1

ZOOM ASS'Y
11 12
CN103
12P

3P 24 25

25P 2 1 CN1200 IC1002

32P

IC105 IC3201

1 2

16 17
IC1200 A1 A10 CN1000 B10 B1 IC100

IC2307

1 IC2306

3 CN106

IC1200

A1 A16 CN1000 B16 B1 IC100 A1 B1 A15 B15 CN101 A1 B1 CN104 A15 B15 A30 B30 CN2901 IC3203

16 17
CN105

A1 B1
17P

CN104

30P

MAIN PCB

CN105

2 1
5 CN102 1 2 CN108 12 11 IC3200 1

A15 B15

2 1
IC2304

5P 12P 12P

R-LCD UNIT

DC10 A,DC10 E,DM-DC10 ONLY

IC2102 IC2305

IC2300 IC1400 IC101 IC1401

A1 B1

IC810

60P 30P

IC1102

IC1103

A1 B1 IC103 IC106 IC3500 IC2301 A12 B12 CN2900

REAR KEY FPC ASS'Y MAIN PCB


5 C N3
2
1 00

23 23P CN901 IC2302 1 IC1101 IC2303

CN3501 1 6

5P

50 51

CN2300 51P

2 1

6P

Metal contact (Pins' face down)


:
5P

Metal contact (Pins' face up)


:

TS MECH RECORDER ASS'Y


6P CN3200

DC JACK
5P

Metal contact

Metal contact

DC JACK PCB
51P

SWITCH FPC ASS'Y USB UNIT FPC

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
MAIN PCB CN100 1 AVDD2.7V 2 ZOOM AD 3 GND 4 PHOTO SW 5 H PHOTO SW 6 DVDD3.3V 7 D ACC LED 8 GND 9 START/STOP SW 10 GND 11 CAM POW SW 12 VTR POW SW CN101 A1 DVDD2.5/1.4V A2 VTR ON A3 SDI DINT A4 SDAO TPC A5 CCM RESET A6 GND A7 PCST3 A8 PCST2 A9 PCST1 A10 PCST0 A11 TRST A12 TMS A13 TDI A14 TDO A15 TCK B1 DBGE B2 DCLK B3 DRESET B4 SYSRDY B5 DEBCLK B6 GND B7 DEBUD B8 DEBDD B9 XDEBEN B10 TBUSY B11 GND B12 DVDD3.3V B13 XRESET B14 DBI B15 PRI TDO CN102 1 GND 2 EJECT SW 3 MOT POSI 4 MOTOR GND 5 MOTOR GND 6 MOTOR SIG 7 MOTOR SIG 8 OPEN Z 9 OPEN LOW 10 GND CN103 1 ST UNREG 2 ST UNREG 3 ST UNREG 4 ST EFCHG 5 ST TMG(0) 6 ST VDHGL(0) 7 ST GND 8 ST GND 9 ST GND 10 ST GND 11 P5V 12 P5V CN104 A1 A2 A3 A4 PANEL OPEN SW A5 GND A6 KEY AD1 A7 KEY AD0 A8 GND A9 GND A10 A11 A12 BATT TEMP A13 BATT INFO D A14 BATT INFO B+ A15 BATT+ B1 BATT B2 BATT B3 BATT B4 BATT B5 BATT B6 BATT B7 BATT B8 BATT B9 BATT+ B10 BATT+ B11 BATT+ B12 BATT+ B13 BATT+ B14 BATT+ B15 BATT+ CN105 1 LI POW 2 GND 3 GND 4 GND 5 CARD DAT2 6 CARD DAT3 7 CARD CMD 8 GND 9 CARD VSS 10 CARD CLK 11 GND 12 CARD DAT0 13 CARD DAT1 14 GND 15 CARD VDD 16 CARD DET 17 CARD DET CN106 1 GND 2 WHITE LED 3 WHITE LED 4 P5V 5 P5V 6 RMC IN CN107 1 GND 2 AUTO 3 P 4 SCN 5 DEW 6 DEW+ CN108 1 CARD MODE SW 2 STILL MODE SW 3 4 KEY AD4 5 DIRECT P LED 6 P5V 7 VTR UNREG 8 CHAR CARD ACC LED 9 KEY AD3 10 KEY AD2 11 GND 12 GND MAIN PCB CN901 1 LCD BT SW 2 LCD BL VFB 3 LCD BL POW 4 LCD BL POW 5 GND 6 GND 7 R OUT(RY) 8 G OUT(Y) 9 B OUT(BY) 10 GND 11 GND 12 GND 13 NC 14 LCD3.3V 15 LCD3.3V 16 LCD5V 17 LCD8.5V 18 LCD CS 19 LCD EE CS 20 TX1 DAT 21 SCLK1 22 RX1 SIN 23 LCD ON CN1000 A1 GND A2 VOUT2 3 GND A4 RG2 A5 GND A6 LH2 A7 H2 A8 GND A9 H1 A10 LH1 A11 GND A12 RG1 A13 GND A14 3.5V A15 VOUT1 A16 GND B1 GND B2 S1 B3 S2 B4 V4B B5 V4A B6 V3B B7 V3A B8 V2B B9 V2A B10 V1B B11 V1A B12 SUB B13 RC SUB B14 CCD 7V B15 CCD 15V B16 GND CN1200 1 FOCUS DRIVE 2 FOCUS DRIVE+ 3 CND 4 CND 5 IG HALL IN+ 6 IG HALL OUT+ 7 IG HALL IN 8 IG HALL OUT 9 GND 10 IG DRIVE 11 IG DRIVE+ 12 GND 13 L TEMP 2.7V 14 L TEMP 15 ZOOM LED 16 ZOOM SENS 17 ZOOM VCC 18 FOCUS GND 19 FOCUS ANAB 20 FOCUS ANAA 21 FOCUS VCC 22 ZOOM A 23 ZOOM B 24 ZOOM A 25 ZOOM B CN1201 1 GY GND 2 Y GY OUT 3 GY GND 4 P GY OUT 5 AVDD2.7V MAIN PCB CN2100 1 AV GND 2 AV L I/O 3 AV R I/O 4 AV GND 5 AVS DET 6 V 7 YC GND 8 D 9 YC GND 10 Y CN2300 1 DSW1 2 M/S 3 +UNREG 4 GND 5 +UNREG 6 POW ON 7 GND 8 GND 9 GND 10 GND 11 +UNREG 12 +UNREG 13 +UNREG 14 REMI 15 DASP 16 CS3FX 17 CS1FX 18 HA2 19 HA0 20 PDIAG 21 HA1 22 IOCS16 23 INTRQ 24 DMACK 25 IORDY 26 GND 27 DIOW 28 DIOR 29 GND 30 DMARQ 31 DD0 32 DD15 33 DD1 34 DD14 35 DD2 36 DD13 37 DD3 38 DD12 39 DD4 40 DD11 41 DD5 42 DD10 43 DD6 44 DD9 45 DD7 46 DD8 47 RESET 48 OPEN Z 49 REMO 50 OPEN LOW 51 SHOCK CN2900 A1 V I/O A2 GND A3 VTR POW SW A4 SUB FCH A5 CAM POW SW A6 FCH 0 A7 EVF R A8 EVF G A9 N.C. A10 GND A11 REMI A12 REMO B1 V I/O B2 EVF HD B3 GND B4 VTR UNREG B5 MIC2 B6 MIC3 B7 EVF COM AC B8 EVF B B9 EVF COM DC B10 GND B11 RS232C RX2 B12 RS232C TX2 MAIN PCB CN2901 A1 AA GND A2 AV L I/O A3 AA GND A4 AV R I/O A5 AV GND A6 EXT DET A7 SOUND A8 GND A9 G OUT(Y) A10 R OUT(RY) A11 B OUT(BY) A12 GND A13 GND A14 A MUTE A15 EVF COM DC A16 EVF COM AC A17 SCLK1 A18 GND A19 WCK A20 AMCK A21 GND A22 LRCK A23 AUD PLL TO AIF A24 AUD AIF TO MACS A25 GND A26 LCD8.5V A27 LCD5V A28 GND A29 GND A30 GND B1 GND B2 EVF G B3 EVF R B4 EVF B B5 GND B6 GND B7 SOUND EN B8 AIF CS B9 PTOM/AIF DATA B10 PTOM/AIF SCK B11 REC MUTE B12 GND B13 XPDI B14 EVF BL ON B15 EVF ON B16 EVF HD B17 EVF CS B18 TX1 DAT B19 AA4.7 B20 AA2.7 B21 GND B22 SP GND B23 SP GND B24 LCD3.3V B25 LCD3.3V B26 P5V B27 P5V B28 GND B29 GND B30 GND CN3200 1 JACK DET 2 DC+ 3 DC+ 4 DC 5 DC CN3501 1 VBUS 2 GND 3 D 4 GND 5 D+ 6 GND CARD PCB CN50 1 CARD DET 2 CARD VDD 3 GND 4 CARD DAT1 5 CARD DAT0 6 GND 7 CARD CLK 8 CARD VSS 9 GND 10 CARD CMD 11 CARD DAT3 12 CARD DAT2 13 GND 14 15 GND 16 LI POW(+) 17 LI POW(+) CN51 1 CD/DAT3 2 CMD 3 VSS1 4 VDD 5 CLK 6 VSS2 7 DAT0 8 DAT1 9 DAT2 10 NC1 11 NC2 12 CARD DET 13 COM 14 G3 15 G4 16 G1 17 G2 SUB PCB CN701 1 MECHA GND 2 INT MIC L 3 INT MIC GND L 4 INT MIC R 5 INT MIC GND R 6 MECHA GND CN801 1 SP 2 SP+ CN1501 1 BL2.7V 2 P5V 3 COM 4 PSIG 5 CS 6 GREEN 7 RED 8 BLUE 9 PCG 10 ENB 11 VCK 12 VST 13 XSTB 14 REF 15 WIDE 16 SCAN 17 HCK1 18 HCK2 19 HST 20 VSSG 21 VSS 22 VDD 23 VDD CN2905 A1 AA GND A2 AV L I/O A3 AA GND A4 AV R I/O A5 AV GND A6 TX PORT PP6 A7 SOUND A8 GND A9 G OUT(Y) A10 R OUT(RY) A11 B OUT(BY) A12 GND A13 GND A14 A MUTE A15 EVF COM DC A16 EVF COM AC A17 SCLK1 A18 GND A19 WCK A20 AMCK A21 GND A22 LRCK A23 AUD PLL TO AIF A24 AUD AIF TO MACS A25 GND A26 LCD8.5V A27 LCD5V A28 GND A29 GND A30 GND B1 GND B2 EVF G B3 EVF R B4 EVF B B5 GND B6 GND B7 SOUND EN B8 AIF CS B9 PTOM/AIF DATA B10 AIF SCK B11 REC MUTE B12 GND B13 XPDI B14 EVF BL ON B15 EVF ON B16 EVF HD B17 EVF CS B18 TX1 DAT B19 AA4.7 B20 AA2.7 B21 GND B22 SP GND B23 SP GND B24 LCD3.3V B25 LCD3.3V B26 P5V B27 P5V B28 GND B29 GND B30 GND LCD PCB CN901 1 LCD ON 2 RX1 SIN 3 SCLK1 4 TX1 DAT 5 LCD EE CS 6 LCD CS 7 LCD8.5V 8 LCD5V 9 LCD3.3V 10 LCD3.3V 11 NC 12 GND 13 GND 14 GND 15 B OUT(BY) 16 G OUT(Y) 17 R OUT(RY) 18 GND 19 GND 20 LCD BL POW 21 LCD BL POW 22 LCD BL VFB 23 LCD BT SW CN902 1 TEST 2 RGT 3 BLUE 4 RED 5 GREEN 6 PSIG 7 HCK1 8 HCK2 9 WIDE 10 TEST 11 REF 12 HST 13 PCG 14 XSTBY 15 VSSG 16 N.C. 17 VSS 18 VDD 19 DWN 20 EN 21 VCK 22 VST 23 CS 24 COM CN903 1 LCD BT SW 2 GND CCD PCB CN1052 A1 GND A2 VOUT2 A3 GND A4 RG2 A5 GND A6 LH2 A7 H2 A8 GND A9 H1 A10 LH1 A11 GND A12 RG1 A13 GND A14 3.5V A15 VOUT1 A16 GND B1 GND B2 S1 B3 S2 B4 V4B B5 V4A B6 V3B B7 V3A B8 V2B B9 V2A B10 V1B B11 V1A B12 SUB B13 RC SUB B14 CCD 7V B15 CCD 15V B16 GND CVF PCB CN4101 VDD 1 VSS 2 VSSG 3 HST 4 HCK2 5 HCK1 6 SCAN 7 WIDE 8 REF 9 10 XSTB 11 VST 12 VCK 13 ENB 14 PCG 15 BLUE 16 RED 17 GREEN 18 CS 19 PSIG 20 COM 21 P5V 22 BL2.7V 23 BL2.7V CN4102 COM 1 CKV1 2 CKV2 3 STV 4 XSTV 5 XENB 6 ENB 7 CSV 8 VBB 9 10 DSD 11 XDSG 12 DSG 13 B 14 R 15 G 16 CSH 17 VDD 18 CKH2 19 CKH1 20 VSS 21 STH 22 XSTH

GYRO PCB CN1601 1 AVDD2.7V 2 P GY OUT 3 GY GND 4 Y GY OUT 5 GY GND

DC10 A DC10 E DM-DC10 ONLY


CCD PCB CN1070 A1 GND A2 CCD OUT A3 GND A4 GND A5 H1 A6 H2 A7 GND A8 RESET A9 GND A10 VH(+15V) B1 GND B2 CAM3.3V B3 VL(7.5V) B4 VBUS B5 SUB SW B6 GND B7 V1 B8 V2 B9 V3 B10 V4

DC10 A DC10 E DM-DC10 ONLY


MAIN PCB CN1000 A1 GND A2 CCD OUT A3 GND A4 GND A5 H1 A6 H2 A7 GND A8 RESET A9 GND A10 VH(+15V) B1 GND B2 CAM3.3V B3 VL(7.5V) B4 VBUS B5 SUB SW B6 GND B7 V1 B8 V2 B9 V3 B10 V4

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY


FLASH PCB CN500 1 P5V 2 P5V 3 ST GND 4 ST GND 5 ST GND 6 ST GND 7 ST VDHGL 8 ST TMG 9 ST EFCHG 10 ST UNREG 11 ST UNREG 12 ST UNREG CN501 1 XE(+) 2 XE() CN502 1 T(+) 2 T()

CAMERA SECTION-1 (DC10 A,DC10 E,DM-DC10 ONLY)

DC10 E, DC20 E

ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL

DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL

CCD PCB
IC1072 NL27WZ16DF BUFFER
H2 12 4 6 OUT Y2 OUT Y1 IN A2 IN A1 3 1

MAIN PCB (1/8)


SUB CONT

J2 CLI

HD D2 VD D1

XTGHD XTGVD TGCLK VGATE AFE RST CAM SCK AFE CS CAM TXD RAWDATA (11) RAWDATA (10) RAWDATA (9) RAWDATA (8) RAWDATA (7) RAWDATA (6) RAWDATA (5) RAWDATA (4) RAWDATA (3) RAWDATA (2) RAWDATA (1) RAWDATA(0) CAM SCK CAM TXD AFE CS SUB CONT AFE RST TGCLK XTGHD XTGVD VGATE RAWDATA DATA 0 to 11 TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

IC1071 NL27WZ16DF BUFFER


H1 11 RG 10 SUB 13 V4 1 2 3 4 CN1070 H2 H1 RESET VSUB V4 V3 V2 V1 SUB SW CCD OUT VL ( 7.5) VH( + 15V) CAM 3.3V CN1000 A6 A5 A8 B4 B10 B9 B8 B7 B5 A2 B3 A10 B2 A2 B3 B2 B5 B7 B8 B9 B10 B4 A8 A5 A6 A10 CCD OUT VL( 7.5V) CAM3.3V SUB SW V1 V2 V3 V4 VSUB RESET H1 H2 VH( + 15V) 4 6 OUT Y2 OUT Y1 IN A2 IN A1 3 1

IC1001 SN74LVC1GU04DCK3 INVERTER


3 1

DCLK2/FD C1 SYNC/VGATE C9 OUT CONT D9 SCK J10 SL K10

X1001

SDATA K9 D11 A2 K5 CCD IN B2

IC1070 ICX416AK CCD

V3 V2 V1

CCD 7V CAM3.3V H9 V4 G10 V3 E9 V2 D10 V1 VSUB CCD15V RESET G9 SUBCK H1 RG G1 H1

Q1074 RCSUB 6 Q1071 Q1073 VOUT 8 CAM 3.3V

IC1002 AD9929BBCZ TG/CDS /AGC/AD /V-DRIVER

A3 B3 A4 B5 B6 A6 B7 A7 A8 D0 B8

TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN PCB

IC1004 MM1612JN 2.8V REGULATOR


VL 14 VDD 7 CAM3.3V 5 V IN V OUT 4

F1 H2

K2 TCVDD A5 DRVDD A10 DVDD B10 VCC K3 AVDD

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

CAMERA SECTION-1 (DC20 A,DC20 E,DM-DC20 ONLY)


DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL CCD OUTPUT SERIAL DATA CPU BUS SIGNAL

DC10 E, DC20 E

CCD PCB
B13 B12 B14 B2 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 A9 A7 A6 A10 A12 A4 B3 A2 A15 B15 A14 CN1052 RC SUB SUB CCD 7V S1 V4B V4A V3B V3A V2B V2A V1B V1A H1 H2 LH2 LH1 RG1 RG2 S2 VOUT2 VOUT1 CCD 15V 3.5V Q1050

CCD 7V 2 3 V4B V4A V3B V3A V2B V2A V1B V1A RC SUB 11 SUB 10

IC1052 SN74LVC2G04DCK3 INVERTER


1 H1 3 6 4 H1 O H1 O

4 5 6 7 8 9 H2 O RG2 O LH2 O 6 4 H2 O RG1 O LH1 O

IC1054 ICX487DQN CCD

VDD2

CCD 15V

VDD1 12 VOUT1 13 VOUT2 24

17 H1 20 H2 22 RG2 21 LH1 2 15 RG1 16 LH1 1

IC1051 SN74LVC2G04DCK3 INVERTER


CCD 15V 3.5V H2 1 3

IC1050 NL27WZ16DF INVERTER


RG2 LH2 1 3 6 4 RG2 O LH2 O 4 CCD 15V

IC1053 NL27WZ16DF INVERTER


LH1 RG1 1 3 6 4 LH1 O RG1 O

10 2

IC1055 LD503S OPE AMP

7 1 9 5 3.5V

MAIN PCB(1/8)
C10 CCDIN A H10 CCDIN B CN1000 A2 A15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B12 A9 A7 A6 A10 A12 A4 B14 B3 B15 A14 B13 B2 VOUT2 VOUT1 V1A V1B V2A V2B V3A V3B V4A V4B SUB H1 H2 LH2 LH1 RG1 RG2 CCD 7V S2 CCD 15V 3.5V RC SUB S1 XSHP 55 SUB 47 V1A 49 V1B 50 V2A 51 V2B 53 V3A 54 V3B 45 V4A 46 V4B 12 H1 CCD 7V AVDD2.7V CCD 15V 3.5V 14 H2 19 RG2 17 RG1 9 8 TG SCK TG CS TG TXD RAWDATA DATA 0 to 11 TGCLK XTGHD XTGVD XTGVD XTGHD TGCLK CCD 15V CCD 7V CCD 15V 3 4 5 LH2 LH1 SCK SEN SSI XSG 38 RST 1 PBLK 34 CLPOB 25 CLPDM 26 SHP 22 SHD 23 ADCLK 27 ADCCK CLPDM CLPOB PBLK XSHD A1 SHP A J2 SHP B B1 SHD A J1 SHD B D1 ADCC F3 CLPD G1 CLPO G2 PBLK E3 STB B0 B K1 B1 B K2 B2 B H3 B3 B J3 B4 B K3 B5 B H4 B6 B J4 B7 B K4 B8 B H5 B9 B K5 B10 B J5 B11 B J6 B12 B K6 SYNC 39 MCKO 36 CKO 35 TG C SYNC MPX CLK MPX TGCLK X1000 B13 B H6 19 CH B(0) 20 CH B(1) 21 CH B(2) 22 CH B(3) 25 CH B(4) 26 CH B(5) 27 CH B(6) 28 CH B(7) 29 CH B(8) 30 CH B(9) 31 CH B(10) 32 CH B(11) 34 CH B(12) 35 CH B(13) 18 CH A(0) 17 CH A(1) 16 CH A(2) 15 CH A(3) 14 CH A(4) 11 CH A(5) 10 CH A(6) 9 8 7 6 1 CH A(7) CH A(8) CH A(9) CH A(10) CH A(11) ADDRESS 40 RAWDATA(0) 65 RAWDATA(1) 66 RAWDATA(2) 67 RAWDATA(3) 68 RAWDATA(4) 69 RAWDATA(5) 70 RAWDATA(6) 71 RAWDATA(7) 72 RAWDATA(8) 74 RAWDATA(9) 75 RAWDATA(10) 76 RAWDATA(11) 77 EADDR M ADD0 DATA(0) 44 DATA(1) 45 DATA(2) 46 DATA(3) 47 DATA(4) 48 DATA(5) 49 DATA(6) 50 DATA(7) 51 DATA(8) 55 DATA(9) 56 DATA(10) 57 DATA(11) 58 DATA(12) 59 DATA(13) 60 DATA(14) 61 DATA(15) 62 EDATA M DATA 0 to 15 EADDR M ADD0 TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

IC1001 CXD3640ER TG

CKI 33

IC1000 VSP2255GSJ CDS/AD

B0 A B2 B1 A A2 B2 A B3 B3 A A3 B4 A C4 B5 A B4 B6 A A4 B7 A C5 B8 A A5 B9 A B5 B10 A B6 B11 A A6

42 TGVD 41 TGHD

TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN PCB

Q1002

Q1003

B12 A C6 CCD 7V B13 A A7 TG C SYNC TGCLK

80 CH A(12) 79 CH A(13) 36 C SYNC 3 5 TGCLK MPXCLK

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

VSUB CONT CCD TEMP TG SCK TG CS TG TXD CAM ON CCD VL ON TGCLK EN MPX XRST XERD M MPX XCS XEWRL M TG XRST XSG1 AFE STANDBY

Q1001

Q1004

MPX CLK MPX MPX XRST XERD M MPX XCS XEWRL M

24 XRST 38 RD 37 CS 39 WE

IC1002 MB87M4483PFT MPX2

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

CAMERA SECTION-2
CPU BUS SIGNAL

DC10 E, DC20 E

GYRO PCB

MAIN PCB(2/8)
CPU D0 D2 CPU D1 C3 CN1601 P GY OUT Y GY OUT AVDD2.7V 2 4 1 2 4 5 CPU D2 C1 CN1201 Y GY OUT P GY OUT AVDD2.7V Y GY OUT P GY OUT AVDD2.7V E5 GYRIN1 G4 GYRIN2 CPU D3 B1 CPU D4 B2 CPU D5 A3 CPU D6 B3 CPU D7 A4 FOCUS DRIVE + CN1200 FOCUS DRIVE ZOOM B ZOOM + B ZOOM A ZOOM + A B8 OUT 3 C8 OUT 3B A4 OUT 5B A3 OUT 5 A5 OUT 4B A6 OUT 4 DI D4 CLK A2 CAM DRIVER TXD CAM DRIVER SCK CAM DRIVER LD IN 1 E2 IN 3 C5 IN 4 C4 IN 5 B3 PWM IRIS PWM VCM PWM ZA PWM ZB PWM IRIS PWM VCM PWM ZA PWM ZB N8 PWM4 L8 PWM3 L7 PWM1 M6 PWM0 CPU D8 C12 CPU D9 D13 CPU D10 E12 CPU D11 E11 CPU D12 F12 CPU D13 F13 CPU D14 F11 CPU D15 G13 EDATA M DATA 0 to 15 EADDR M ADD0 to 10 TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

AVDD2.7V

IC1603 VCC ENC-03MA OUT P SENSOR GYRO

AVDD2.7V 2

AVDD2.7V

VCC

IC1604 ENC-03MB OUT Y SENSOR GYRO

TO LENS UNIT

2 1 23 25 22 24 11 10 5 6 7 8 19 20 16 14 15 21 13 17

FOCUS DRIVE + FOCUS DRIVE ZOOM B ZOOM B ZOOM A ZOOM A IG DRIVE + IG DRIVE IG HALL IN + IG HALL OUT + IG HALL IN IG HALL OUT FOCUS ANAB FOCUS ANAA ZOOM SENS L TEMP ZOOM LED FOCUS VCC L TEMP 2.7V ZOOM VCC

IG DRIVE + IG DRIVE IG HALL IN( + ) IG HALL OUT( + ) AVDD 2.7V IG HALL IN( ) IG HALL OUT( )

C1 OUT1B B1 OUT1 E6 HALL2 + IN G7 HALL2 + OUT D6 HALL2 IN F7 HALL2 OUT

IC1200 BH9970GU LENS DRIVER

LD B4

CPU A1 H12 CPU A2 H13 CPU A3 J12 CPU A4 J13 CPU A5 J11 DAC3 OUT D3 EN 4.5 B6 EN 2.3 C6 PANEL BL CTRL Z PSV ND F PSV IRIS CL I SW Y GYRO P GYRO I ENC I ENC H3 AD6 VDDL1 L5 4 VOUT

IC1400 MB87R1220BGL-GE1 LAP

CPU A6 K12 CPU A7 L11 CPU A8 L13 CPU A9 M13 CPU A10 M12 CPU AD11 N11 VDDI 1.8V

Q1200

IRIS CONT E3 P5V B5 VM4.5 B7 VM3 D7 VM2 B2 VM1 GAIN1.2 G2 GYRLEV1 H4 GYRLEV2 F4 AELEV2 F6

IC1401 NJM2865F3 1.8V REGULATOR

VIN

DVDD2.5V

AVDD2.7V

F8 VC

MR ENC AD2 MR ENC AD1

F2 AD3 F1 AD2 X IN C5 XRESET N5 CPU RDY B9 CPU INT A8 CPU XCS B8

VMCLK LAP XRST LAP RDY LAP XINT LAP XCS XEWRL M XERD M VMCLK LAP XRST LAP RDY LAP XINT LAP XCS XEWRL M XERD M DEBDD XDEBEN DEBCLK DEBUD CAM DRIVER TXD CAM DRIVER SCK CAM DRIVER LD PANEL BL CTRL Z PSV ND F PSV IRIS CL I SW Y GYRO P GYRO I ENC Z RES SW L TEMP LED RET TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN PCB

DVDD2.7V

M11 VDDH1 C9 VDDH2 B6 VDDH3

CPU XWR C7 CPU XRD A7 DEBDD C13

AVDD2.7V

H2 AVDD

XDEBEN B12 DEBCK A12

VDDI 1.8V

B10 VDDL2

DEBUD A11

TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN PCB

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

CAMERA SECTION-3
MAIN PCB(3/8)

CPU BUS SIGNAL

DC10 E, DC20 E
E DATA 8 to 15 E ADD 0 to 2 XEWR0 XERD XECS3 XEINT S TCK TMS TRST PRI TDO EDATA 10 EDATA 11 EDATA 12 EDATA 13 EDATA 14 MADDR L14 EDATA 15 EDATA 8 EDATA 9 TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION MAIN PCB

MADDR L10

MADDR L13

MDQM L(3)

MDQM L(2)

MDQM L(1)

MDQM L(0)

MADDR L0

MADDR L1

MADDR L2

MADDR L3

MADDR L4

MADDR L5

MADDR L6

MADDR L7

MADDR L8

MADDR L9

XMCAS L

XMRAS L

XMWE L

XMCS L

MCKE L

MCLK L

C10

D11

C11

D12

D13

C13

D15

C14

A10

B11

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

B15

B14

N4

P1

M1

M2

M3

M4

D9

C9

C8

B9

A9

A8

L1

L2

L3

L4

P2

XEWR S

XECS S

MADDR L(0)

MADDR L(1)

MADDR L(2)

MADDR L(3)

MADDR L(4)

MADDR L(5)

MADDR L(6)

MADDR L(7)

MADDR L(8)

MADDR L(9)

MADDR L(10)

MADDR L(13)

MADDR L(14)

XMCAS L

XMWE L

EDATA S(0)

EDATA S(1)

EDATA S(2)

EDATA S(3)

EDATA S(4)

EDATA S(5)

EDATA S(6)

EDATA S(7)

XMRAS L

MDQM L(3)

MDQM L(2)

MDQM L(1)

MDQM L(0)

EADDR S(0)

EADDR S(1)

K8 /WE

K7 /CAS

J9 /RAS

J8 /CS

J1 CLK

J2 CKE

F2 DQM3

F8 DQM2

K1 DQM1

K9 DQM0

G8 G9 A0 A1

F7 A2

F3 A3

G1 G2 G3 A4 A5 A6

H1 A7

H2 A8

J3 A9

G7 A10

J7 BA0

H8 BA1 DQ0 R8 DQ1 N7 DQ2 R9 DQ3 N8 DQ4 P9 DQ5 M8 DQ6 M7 DQ7 L8 DQ8 L2 DQ9 M3 DQ10 M2 DQ11 P1 DQ12 N2 DQ13 R1 DQ14 N3 MDATA L0 MDATA L1 MDATA L2 MDATA L3 MDATA L4 MDATA L5 MDATA L6 MDATA L7 MDATA L8 MDATA L9 MDATA L10 MDATA L11 MDATA L12 MDATA L13 MDATA L14 MDATA L15 MDATA L16 MDATA L17 MDATA L18 MDATA L19 MDATA L20 MDATA L21 MDATA L22 MDATA L23 MDATA L24 MDATA L25 MDATA L26 MDATA L27 MDATA L28 MDATA L29 MDATA L30 MDATA L31 C21 B20 C20 D20 A19 B19 D19 A18 B18 C18 D18 A17 B17 D17 A16 C16 D8 A7 B7 C7 D7 B6 C6 D6 A5 C5 D5 B4 C4 A3 B3 A2 MDATA L(0) MDATA L(1) MDATA L(2) MDATA L(3) MDATA L(4) MDATA L(5) MDATA L(6) MDATA L(7) MDATA L(8) MDATA L(9) MDATA L(10) MDATA L(11) MDATA L(12) MDATA L(13) MDATA L(14) MDATA L(15) MDATA L(16) MDATA L(17) MDATA L(18) MDATA L(19) MDATA L(20) MDATA L(21) MDATA L(22) MDATA L(23) MDATA L(24) MDATA L(25) MDATA L(26) MDATA L(27) MDATA L(28) MDATA L(29) MDATA L(30) MDATA L(31)

EADDR S(2)

EADDR M(0) EADDR M(1) EADDR M(2) EADDR M(3)

XEINT S V22 V23 V24 V25 Y23 Y24 Y25

XMCS L

MCKE L

MCLK L

IC1102 K4S64323LH-HN75 SDRAM

DQ15 R2 DQ16 E8 DQ17 D7 DQ18 D8 DQ19 B9 DQ20 C8 DQ21 A9 DQ22 C7 DQ23 A8 DQ24 A2 DQ25 C3 DQ26 A1 DQ27 C2 DQ28 B1 DQ29 D2 DQ30 D3 DQ31 E2

XERD S

EADDR M(4) W22 EADDR M(5) W23 EADDR M(6) W24 EADDR M(7) W25 EADDR M(8) EADDR M(9) EADDR M(10)

EADDR M(11) AA22 EADDR M(12) AA23 EADDR M(13) AA24 EADDR M(14) AA25 EADDR M(15) AB22 EADDR M(16) AB23 EADDR M(17) AB24 EADDR M(18) AB25 EADDR M(19) AC23 EADDR M(20) AC24 EADDR M(21) AC25 EADDR M(22) AD24 EDATA M(0) AD23 EDATA M(1) AE23 EADDR M ADD 0 to 22 EDATA M DATA 0 to 15 MACS RDY MACS XCS XEWRL M XEWRU M XERD M MACS XINT1 MACS XINT0 TRST TMS TCK MACS TDO MACS XRST PRI TDO TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

IC1103(1/2) MB87M1982BGL-GE1 DIGIC DV

EDATA M(2) AD22 EDATA M(3) AE22 EDATA M(4) AC21 EDATA M(5) AD21 EDATA M(6) AE21

DQ0 R8 DQ1 N7 DQ2 R9 DQ3 N8 DQ4 P9 DQ5 M8 DQ6 M7 DQ7 L8 DQ8 L2 DQ9 M3 DQ10 M2 DQ11 P1 DQ12 N2 DQ13 R1 DQ14 N3

MDATA U0 MDATA U1 MDATA U2 MDATA U3 MDATA U4 MDATA U5 MDATA U6 MDATA U7 MDATA U8 MDATA U9 MDATA U10 MDATA U11 MDATA U12 MDATA U13 MDATA U14 MDATA U15 MDATA U16 MDATA U17 MDATA U18 MDATA U19 MDATA U20 MDATA U21 MDATA U22 MDATA U23 MDATA U24 MDATA U25 MDATA U26 MDATA U27 MDATA U28 MDATA U29 MDATA U30 MDATA U31

U25 U22 T25 T24 T22 R25 R24 R23 R22 P25 P24 P23 N25 N24 M25 M24 B25 C25 D25 A24 B24 C24 D24 A23 B23 C23 D23 A22 B22 C22 A21 B21

MDATA U(0) MDATA U(1) MDATA U(2) MDATA U(3) MDATA U(4) MDATA U(5) MDATA U(6) MDATA U(7) MDATA U(8) MDATA U(9) MDATA U(10) MDATA U(11) MDATA U(12) MDATA U(13) MDATA U(14) MDATA U(15) MDATA U(16) MDATA U(17) MDATA U(18) MDATA U(19) MDATA U(20) MDATA U(21) MDATA U(22) MDATA U(23) MDATA U(24) MDATA U(25) MDATA U(26) MDATA U(27) MDATA U(28) MDATA U(29) MDATA U(30) MADDR U(10) MADDR U(13) MADDR U(0) MADDR U(1) MADDR U(2) MADDR U(3) MADDR U(4) MADDR U(5) MADDR U(6) MADDR U(7) MADDR U(8) MADDR U(9) MDQM U(3) MDQM U(2) MDQM U(1) MDQM U(0) MDATA U(31) MADDR U(14) XMCAS U XMRAS U

EDATA M(7) AB20 EDATA M(8) AC20 EDATA M(9) AD20 EDATA M(10) AB19 EDATA M(11) AC19 EDATA M(12) AD19 EDATA M(13) AE19 EDATA M(14) AD18 EDATA M(15) AE18 RDY AB16 XECS M AC17 XEWRL M AB18 XEWRU M AB17 XERD M AC16 XEINT (0) AD16 XEINT (1) AE16 TRST TMS TCK TDO T2 T3 T1 T4 MACS TDO MACS XRST PRI TDO MACS XINT0 MACS XINT1 MACS XCS

IC1101 K4S64323LH-HN75 SDRAM

DQ15 R2 DQ16 E8 DQ17 D7 DQ18 D8 DQ19 B9 DQ20 C8 DQ21 A9 DQ22 C7 DQ23 A8 DQ24 A2 DQ25 C3 DQ26 A1 DQ27 C2 DQ28 B1 DQ29 D2

XRESET AD1 TDI R2

MCCLK A MCDT A(3) MCDT A(2) MCDT A(1) MCDT A(0) MCCMD A

R1 W1 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 W2

K4

P4

P3

CARD CLK CARD DAT3 CARD DAT2 CARD DAT1 CARD DAT0 CARD CMD CARD CLK CARD DAT3 CARD DAT2 CARD DAT1 CARD DAT0 CARD CMD TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

DQM3

DQM2

DQM1

DQM0

DQ30 D3 BA0 BA1 A10 DQ31 E2 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9

/CAS

/RAS

CKE

CLK

/WE

/CS

XMCS U

MCKE U

MCLK U

K8

K7

J9

J8

J1

J2

F2

F8

K1

K9

G8 G9

F7

F3

G1 G2 G3

H1

H2

J3

G7

J7

H8

XMWE U

STROBE TMG(0)

J3

ST TMG

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY

MADDR U10

MADDR U13

MADDR U14

MDQM U(3)

MDQM U(2)

MDQM U(1)

MDQM U(0)

M23

MADDR U0

MADDR U1

MADDR U2

MADDR U3

MADDR U4

MADDR U5

MADDR U6

MADDR U7

MADDR U8

01

Sep. 2005

MADDR U9

XMCAS U

XMRAS U

XMWE U

XMCS U

MCKE U

MCLK U

M22

G22

G23

G24

G25

H22

H24

E25

K23

E24

K25

K24

E23

F23

F24

F25

L22

L25

L23

L24

J22

J25

CANON INC. 2005

CAMERA SECTION-4
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL

DC10 E, DC20 E

MAIN PCB(4/8)

DC10 A,DC10 E,DM-DC10 ONLY


VGATE H3 VGATE

G2 TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN PCB XTGHD XTGVD RAWDATA DATA 0 to 11 TGCLK G4 E3 E2 E1 D4 A19 A22 A24 A23 A20 B20 B26 B27 B19 B24 B25 A26 A27 A11 A9 A10 B18 A17 CN2901 WCK LRCK AUD AIF TO MACS AUD PLL TO AIF AMCK AA2.7V P5V P5V AA4.7V LCD3.3V LCD3.3V LCD8.5V LCD5V B OUT(B-Y) G OUT(Y) R OUT(R-Y) TX1 DAT SCLK1 D2 D1 C3 C2 AA2.7V P5V AA4.7V LCD3.3V LCD8.5V LCD5V AUD PLL TO AIF AMCK PLL CONT0 PLL CONT1 9 18 4 8 DA DATA 256FS REC PB DELAY BCK LRCK DATA IN 13 14 7 WCK LRCK AUD MACS TO PLL C1 B2 B1 A1 F4

TGHD TGVD RAWDATA (0) RAWDATA (1) RAWDATA (2) RAWDATA (3) RAWDATA (4) RAWDATA (5) RAWDATA (6) RAWDATA (7) RAWDATA (8) RAWDATA (9) RAWDATA (10) RAWDATA (11) TGCLK

TO CAMERA SECTION-5 SUB JUNCTION PCB CN2905

20 64FS 3.07M FS 48K BCK PLL TO PRI LRCK PLL TO PRI TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB VMCLK 17 16 12 11 22

768FS 64FS FS BCK0 IN LRCK0 IN REF

IC810 ICS423G-01LF AUDIO PLL


VDD1 VDD2 VDD3 VDD4 VDD5 2 6 15 19 23 PLL2.7V

IC1103(2/2) MB87M1982BGL-GE1 DIGIC DV

VMCLK AUD MACS TO PLL AUD AIF TO MACS F4 C16 C14 64FS 3.07M FS 48K BCK PLL TO PRI LRCK PLL TO PRI CN901 B OUT(B-Y) G OUT(Y) R OUT(R-Y) TX1 DAT SCLK1 LCD ON LCD EE CS RX1 SIN LCD CS LCD BL POW LCD BL POW LCD BL VFB LCD BT SW LCD3.3V LCD3.3V LCD5V LCD8.5V PLL CONT0 PLL CONT1 A26 B26 B29 B25 T25 V29 R656CLKI VMCLK AMCLK1 BCKI LRCKI BCKO LRCKO NSCLK (0) NSCL (0) REC656I (0) REC656I (1) AH22 AF22 AJ23 AJ21 AH23 AG23 AF23 AE23 F1 F2 F3 E1 E2 E3 D1 D3 AE13 AE12 AD12 AC12 AD11 AC11 AB11 AD10 AB10 AE9 AD9 AC9 AB9 AE8 AD8 AC8 ADATA (0) ADATA (1) ADATA (2) ADATA (3) ADATA (4) ADATA (5) ADATA (6) ADATA (7) BDATA (0) BDATA (1) BDATA (2) BDATA (3) BDATA (4) BDATA (5) BDATA (6) BDATA (7) ADATAO ADATAI CXCLK D24 A27 D27 AUD PRI TO MACS AUD MACS TO PRI PXCLK AUD PRI TO MACS AUD MACS TO PRI LRCK WCK PXCLK VMCLK AD2 AE3 AD3 AE4 AE2 AE1 AE10 AE11 AUDO2 AUDI1 AUDI2 AUDO1 LPCLK WCLK BDATACLK VCLK

TO LCD PCB SECTION LCD PCB CN901

9 8 7 20 21 23 19 22 18 3 4 2 1 14 15 16 17

IC2300(1/3) R8A34013BG BACK END

REC656I (2) REC656I (3) REC656I (4) REC656I (5) REC656I (6) REC656I (7) REC656O (0) REC656O (1) REC656O (2) REC656O (3) REC656O (4) REC656O (5) REC656O (6)

LCD ON LCD EE CS RX1 SIN LCD CS SCLK1 TX1 DAT LCD3.3V LCD5V LCD8.5V B OUT(B-Y) G OUT(Y) R OUT(R-Y)

N29 AB27 AB25 AC27 Y29 AD27 AJ27 AJ29 AH28

HDACK(1) CTS(1) RX(1) RTS(1) SCLK(1) TX(1) BOUT GOUT ROUT

J25

HDREQ(1)

REC656O (7)

TO SYSTEN CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN PCB

LCD BT SW LCD BL POW LCD BL VFB LCD BL ON

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

CAMERA SECTION-5
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL

DC10 E, DC20 E

CVF PCB

SUB PCB

BACKLIGHT Q4101

LCD (CVF)

1 8 9 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 16

CN4102 VDD WIDE REF HST HCK2 HCK1 SCAN XSTB VST VCK ENB PCG BLUE GREEN CS PSIG COM RED

CN4101 P5V BL2.7V BL2.7V REF HST HCK2 HCK1 SCAN WIDE XSTB VST VCK PCG BLUE RED GREEN CS PSIG COM ENB VDD

21 23 22 9 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 13 1

16 19 17 18 6 7 8 15 14 10 13 12 11 9 5 3 4 1 2 23 22

CN1501 SCAN HST HCK1 HCK2 GREEN RED BLUE WIDE REF ENB XSTB VST VCK PCG CS COM PSIG BL2.7V P5V VDD VDD

13 RGT 17 HST 14 HCK1 15 HCK2 EVF G EVF R EVF B 35 G OUT 34 R OUT 33 B OUT 16 WIDE 42 REF 22 EN 20 XSTB 24 VST P5V 23 VCK 19 PCG 39 COM 38 COM-DC 37 PSIG OUT 39 VCCCOM EVF8.5V 47 VCC 2 41 DA OUT 26 POF Q1504 LCD 8.5V VCC1-1 5 4 VOUT LCD 5V Q1503 VCC 5V B/B-Y 46 G/Y 44 R/R-Y 45 HDO 27

IC1501 CXM3009TQ CVF DRIVER

SCK SDAT SEN

7 8 6

SCLK1 TX1 DAT EVF CS Q1502

VCC1-2 43 VDD1 18 VDD2 29 VCC2 36 VCC5V

IC1502 NJM2865F3 2.8 REGULATOR

VIN

Q821

SPEAKER
2 1 CN801 SP + SP

TO MIC UNIT

4 2

CN701 INT MIC R INT MIC L

AA4.7V

P5V

AA2.7V AA2.7V P5V 45 42 AA4.7V LCD8.5V LCD5V

32

19

47

34

41

40

LRCK AMCK WCK AUD PLL TO AIF AUD AIF TO MACS

3 4 5 6 7 AUDIO I/F CONTROLLER ALC1 HPF FIL1 FIL2 EQ FIL3

MIC POWER

CN2905 EVF HD EVF COM DC EVF G EVF R EVF B EVF COM AC B OUT(B-Y) G OUT(Y) R OUT(R-Y) SCLK1 TX1 DAT EVF CS EVF ON LCD3.3V LDC3.3V A MUTE AV L I/O AV R I/O SOUND XPDI REC MUTE PTOM/AIF DATA AIF CS AIF SCK AMCK WCK LRCK AUD PLL TO AIF AUD AIF TO MACS AA2.7V P5V P5V AA4.7V LCD8.5V LCD5V

B16 A15 B2 B3 B4 A16 A11 A9 A10 A17 B18 B17 B15 B24 B25 A14 A2 A4 A7 B13 B11 B9 B8 B10 A20 A19 A22 A23 A24 B20 B26 B27 B19 A26 A27

TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION MAIN PCB CN2901

TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN PCB CN2901

PRE AMP 28

+ 2db to 2db

24db + 12db 0db

OVF DETECT

OFFSET CANCEL HPF

OFFSET CANCEL HPF

26 ADC 44 39 PRE AMP 27 Q803

MIXER & DEM

25 DAC OPGA MIX 36 Q804

IC801 AK4567 AIF4


LINE OUT PTOM/AIF DATA 12 CONTROL REGISTER I/F

31 HP AMP 29 35 21 ALC2 SPK AMP 20 13 AIF CS 14 PTOM/AIF SCK 16 REC MUTE 17 XPDI 23 24 2 SP + SP

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

CAMERA SECTION-6
MAIN PCB(5/8)
AG4 AG5 AG6 AH8 AH6 AH5 AF6 AF5 AJ8 AJ7 AJ5 AJ4 D1 DQ0 D1 DQ1 D1 DQ2 D1 DQ3 D1 DQ4 D1 DQ5 D1 DQ6 D1 DQ7 D1 DQ8 D1 DQ9 D1 DQ10 D1 DQ11 D1 DQ12 D1 DQ13 D1 DQ14 D1 DQ15 D1 UDQS D1 LDQS D1 UDM D1 LDM D A0 D A1 D A2 D A3 D A4 D A5 D A6 D A7 D A8 D A9 D A10 D A11 D WE D CAS D CS D RAS D BA 0 D BA1

DC10 E,DC20 E

DADRS(11)

DADRS(8)

DADRS(5)

DADRS(9)

DADRS(7)

DADRS(10)

DADRS(6)

DADRS(4)

DADRS(3)

DADRS(2)

DADRS(1)

DADRS(0)

DDATA(0) DDATA(1)

AF10 AE10

A8 DQ0 B9 DQ1 B7 DQ2 C9 DQ3 C7 DQ4 D9 DQ5 D7 DQ6 E9 DQ7 E1 DQ8 D3 DQ9 D1 DQ10 C3 DQ11 C1 DQ12 B3 DQ13 B1 DQ14 A2 DQ15 E3 UDQS E7 LDQS F3 UDM F7 LDM G2 CK G3 /CK

A0 K7 A1 L8 A2 L7 A3 M8 A4 M2 A5 L3 A6 L2 A7 K3 A8 K2 A9 J3 A10 K8 A11 J2 /WE G7 /CAS G8 /CS H8 /RAS H7 BA0 J8

DDATA(2) AG10 DDATA(3) DDATA(4) DDATA(5) DDATA(6) DDATA(7) DDATA(8) AG9 AE11 AH10 AF11 AJ9 AH14

TO TS MECH

21 19 18 17 16 28 27 24 30 23 25 47 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 46 44 42 40 38 36 34 32 6 51 3 5 11 12 13 14 49 50 15 48

CN2300 HA1 HA0 HA2 CS1FX CS3FX DIOR DIOW DMACK DMARQ INTRQ IORDY RESET DD0 DD1 DD2 DD3 DD4 DD5 DD6 DD7 DD8 DD9 DD10 DD11 DD12 DD13 DD14 DD15 POW ON SHOCK + UNREG + UNREG + UNREG + UNREG + UNREG REMI REMO OPEN LOW DASP OPEN Z

AT1 ADD1 AT1 ADD0 AT1 ADD2 AT1 CS0 AT1 CS1 AT1 DIOR AT1 DIOW AT1 DMACK AT1 DMARQ AT1 INTRQ AT1 IORDY AT1 RESET

A9 D8 C8 E8 A8 B9 A10 B10 A14 C13 D13 E9 C10 C9 A11 E10 B11 D10 C11 E11 D11 A12 B12 C12 A13 D12 B13 E13

AT1ADR(1) AT1ADR(0) AT1ADR(2) AT1CS(0) AT1CS(1) AT1DIOR AT1DIOW AT1DMACK AT1DMARQ AT1INTRQ AT1IORDY AT1RESET AT1DATA(0) AT1DATA(1) AT1DATA(2) AT1DATA(3) AT1DATA(4) AT1DATA(5) AT1DATA(6) AT1DATA(7) AT1DATA(8) AT1DATA(9) AT1DATA(10) AT1DATA(11) AT1DATA(12) AT1DATA(13) AT1DATA(14) AT1DATA(15)

DDATA(9) AG11 DDATA(10) DDATA(11) DDATA(12) DDATA(13) DDATA(14) AJ13 AE12 AF13 AF12 AE13

IC1650 PKGS-25NB SHOCK SENSOR

AT1 DATA0 2 AT1 DATA1 AT1 DATA2 AT1 DATA3 AT1 DATA4 AT1 DATA5 AT1 DATA6 AT1 DATA7

DDATA(15) AG12 DDQS(1) DDQS(0) DDM(1) DDM(0) DCLKO DCLKNO AH13 AJ10 AJ12 AH11 AH4 AH3

IC2304 EDD1216AASE-6B-E DDR SDRAM

BA1 J7

CKE H3

7 FE UNREG 2 FE UNREG 1 1 2 4 5 6

CMO SIA SOA A3I A3O CMI

DO 14 SIB 16

AT1 DATA8 AT1 DATA9 AT1 DATA10 AT1 DATA11 AT1 DATA12 AT1 DATA13 AVDD3.3V AT1 DATA14 AT1 DATA15

IC1651 TB6066FNG SENSOR IC

SOB 15 A2I 13 A1I 11 A1O 10 VCC 9

G2 CK G3 /CK DDATA(16) AE15 D2 DQ0 D2 DQ1 D2 DQ2 D2 DQ3 D2 DQ4 D2 DQ5 D2 DQ6 D2 DQ7 D2 DQ8 D2 DQ9 D2 DQ10 D2 DQ11 D2 DQ12 D2 DQ13 D2 DQ14 D2 DQ15 D2 UDQS D2 LDQS D2 UDM D2 LDM A8 DQ0 B9 DQ1 B7 DQ2 C9 DQ3 C7 DQ4 D9 DQ5 D7 DQ6 E9 DQ7 E1 DQ8 D3 DQ9 D1 DQ10 C3 DQ11 C1 DQ12 B3 DQ13 B1 DQ14 A2 DQ15 E3 UDQS E7 LDQS F3 F7 UDM LDM

A0 K7 A1 L8 A2 L7 A3 M8 A4 M2 A5 L3 A6 L2 A7 K3 A8 K2 A9 J3 A10 K8 A11 J2 /WE G7 /CAS G8 /CS H8 /RAS H7

D A0 D A1 D A2 D A3 D A4 D A5 D A6 D A7 D A8 D A9 D A10 D A11 D WE D CAS D CS D RAS D BA 0 D BA1

DDATA(17) AG14 DDATA(18) DDATA(19) AF15 AE14

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

OPEN Z DACCESS OPEN LOW MOT POSI MTOP REQ PTOM CS MTOP/AIF DATA MOT ON FCH 0 CAM POW ON VTR POW ON

DDATA(20) AG15 OPEN LOW MOT POSI MTOP REQ PTOM CS MTOP/AIF DATA MOT ON DDATA(21) V27 V28 V25 AB29 AD29 U28 NSCLK(1) NSCS(1) INT(1) INT(6) RX(0) NSDARX(1) AJ15

DDATA(22) AG16 DDATA(23) DDATA(24) AJ14 AJ19 AF16 AH18 AE16

IC2300(2/3) R8A34013BG BACK END

DDATA(25) DDATA(26) DDATA(27)

DDATA(28) AG18 DDATA(29) AG17 CN2900 VTR POW ON CAM POW ON FCH 0 REMO REMI DDATA(30) DDATA(31) DDQS(3) DDQS(2) DDM(3) DDM(2) DWE DCAS DCS DRAS DBA(0) DBA(1) ARDATA(0) ARDATA(1) ARDATA(2) ARDATA(3) ARDATA(4) ARDATA(5) ARDATA(6) ARDATA(7) ARDATA(8) ARDATA(9) ARDATA(10) ARDATA(11) ARDATA(12) ARDATA(13) ARDATA(14) ARDATA(15) ARDQS(0) ARDQS(1) ARDM(0) ARADRS(10) ARADRS(11) ARADRS(12) ARADRS(0) ARADRS(3) ARADRS(6) ARADRS(1) ARADRS(2) ARADRS(4) ARADRS(5) ARADRS(7) ARADRS(8) ARADRS(9) ARDM(1) ARCLKO ARCLKNO AE17 AF17 AJ18 AH15 AJ17 AH16 AE9 AF8 AG7 AE8 AE7 AF7 T4 U5 U4 U3 V5 V3 W5 W4 W1 W2 V1 V2 U2 T1 R1 T3 Y4 E15

NC

A3 A5 A6 A12 A11

IC2305 EDD1216AASE-6B-E DDR SDRAM

BA0 J8 BA1 J7

CKE H3

AR DQ0 AR DQ1 AR DQ2 AR DQ3 AR DQ4 AR DQ5 AR DQ6 AR DQ7 AR DQ8 AR DQ9 AR DQ10 AR DQ11 AR DQ12 AR DQ13 AR DQ14 AR DQ15 AR LDQS AR UDQS AR LDM AR UDM

2 4 5 7 8

DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4

CKE 44

/WE 21 /CAS 22 /CS 24 /RAS 23 BA0 26 BA1 27 A0 29 A1 30 A2 31 A3 32 A4 35 A5 36 A6 37

AR WE AR CAS AR CS0 AR RAS AR BA0 AR BA1 AR A0 AR A1 AR A2 AR A3 AR A4 AR A5 AR A6 AR A7 AR A8 AR A9 AR A10 AR A11 AR A12

10 DQ5 11 DQ6 13 DQ7 54 DQ8 56 DQ9 57 DQ10 59 DQ11 60 DQ12 62 DQ13 63 DQ14 65 DQ15 16 LDQS 51 UDQS 20 LDM 47 UDM 45 CK 46 /CK

Y1 Y3 AA2 AG2 AG1

IC2306 EDD5116ADTA-6B-E DDR SDRAM

A7 38 A8 39 A9 40 A10(AP) 28 A11 41 A12 42

ARCS(0)

ARBA(0)

ARRAS

ARWE

ARBA(1)

ARCAS

AD1

AC2

AC1

AD3

AE5

AE2

AE4

AE3

AC4

AD4

AA3

AA4

AB3

Q2300 TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION MIAN PCB XRESET

01

Sep. 2005

AB5

AB2

AB1

AF3

AF2

AF1

CANON INC. 2005

SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION


MAIN PCB(6/8)
ZD3701 ZD3700

CPU BUS SIGNAL

Battery charge

Power for Battery

DC10 E, DC20 E
R5 VSUB CONT (SPORTSPACK POW SW) M2 A PWM T3 SOUND EN U2 PTOM/AIF SCK P9 AV DET SOUND AFE RST AFE CS XERD M XEWRL M CAM SCK CAM TXD SUB CONT

T11 N8 V12 T12 R5 AFE RST AFE CS CAM TXD SUB CONT CAM SCK

A3 F16 P3 R11 T11 D12 N8 V11 V10 V12 T12 L2 TG XRST TG TXD TG CS AFE STANDBY MPX XRST CCD TEMP CCD VL ON TGCLK EN MPX XCS TG SCK XSG1 CAM O

TO OPE

1 6 4 2 5 9 11 12 7

CN100 AVDD2.7V DVDD3.3V PHOTO SW ZOOM AD H PHOTO SW START/STOP SW CAM POW SW VTR POW SW D ACC LED DACCESS

AVDD2.7V DVDD3.3V

DC10 A DC10 E DM-DC10 ONLY

TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN PCB

E8 ZOOM AD T13 HARF PHOTO SW R13 PHOTO SW U13 START/STOP SW Q107 Q111 Q110 V3 FLASH LED P5V B14 RMC PULSE IN ZD3702

PTOM/AIF DATA R9 CASSETTEMEMORY A/D1 D5 CASSETTEMEMORY A/D2 C4 MIC2 V4 MIC3 U4 L TEMP E9 Z RES SW E11 I ENC A8 LED RET A13 IRIS CL B9 Z PSV B10 I SW B11 Y GYRO B7 P GYRO A7 ND F PSV A10 MIC2 MIC3

TO CAMERA SECTION-6 MAIN PCB TO FPC SECTION FRONT PCB 2 3 4 5 6

CN106 WHITE LED WHITE LED P5V P5V RMC IN CN108 STILL MODE SW CARD MODE SW KEY AD4 KEY AD3 KEY AD2 DIRECT P LED CHAR CARD ACC LED VTR UNREG P5V CN104 PANEL OPEN SW KEY AD1 KEY AD0 BATT TEMP BATT INFO D BATT INFO B + BATT +

CCD TEMP XSG1 AFE STANDBY MPX XRST CCD VL ON TGCLK EN TG XRST MPX XCS CAM ON XERD M XEWRL M TG SCK TG TXD TG CS VSUB CONT

TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN PCB

TO FPC SECTION REAR KEY FPC

2 1 4 9 10 5 8 7 6

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY


TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION MAIN PCB

VTR UNREG P5V

CARD DET1 E13 DEW B4 MODE DIAL A/D1 C3 MODE DIAL A/D0 A4 EADDR MADD0 P14 EADDR MADD1 R14 C6 KEY AD3 EADDR MADD2 T14 EADDR MADD3 P15 EADDR MADD4 R15 EADDR MADD5 T15 EADDR MADD6 U15 SCN P

TO FPC SECTION RKEY FPC

TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION MAIN PCB

A4 A6 A7 A12 A13 A14 A15 B9 to B15 B1 to B8

BATT +

B6 KEY AD2 D6 KEY AD4

SOUND SOUND EN AV DET PTOM/AIF SCK PTOM/AIF DATA MIC 2 MIC3 L TEMP Z RES SW I ENC LED RET IRIS CL Z PSV ND F PSV Y GYRO P GYRO I SW

TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB

BATT

N4 (TAPE/CARD SW) A6 KEY AD1

XPLLRESET XRESET DBI TDI

Q106 (DM-DC20) Q105 (DM-DC10) Q115

C5 KEY AD0 K3 XPLLRESET

IC101 TMP1962-D83 CCM MI-COM

EADDR MADD7 V15 EADDR MADD8 R16 EADDR MADD9 T16 EADDR MADD10 U16 VTR UNREG 5 VIN

CN107 P SCN DEW + CN105 CARD DET CARD DET LI POW CARD VDD CARD DAT2 CARD DAT3 CARD CMD CARD CLK CARD DAT0 CARD DAT1

3 4 6

TO FPC SECTION AE FPC

Q113 TO FLASH PCB SECTION FLASH PCB CN500 5 1 2 3 4 6 12 11 CN103 ST TMG(0) ST UNREG ST UNREG ST UNREG ST EFCHG ST VDHGL(0) P5V P5V L3 XRESET ST UNREG B5 ST VDHGL VL0 V2 ST EFCHG P5V Q105 (DM-DC20) Q104 (DM-DC10) N2 CARD ACC CHG LED Q103 M1 DIRECT PRI LED CHG LED SP100

EADDR MADD11 V16 EADDR MADD12 T17 EADDR MADD13 U17 EADDR MADD14 V17 EADDR MADD15 T18 EADDR MADD16 R17 EADDR MADD17 R18 EADDR MADD18 P16 EADDR MADD19 P17 EADDR MADD20 P18

IC104 NJM2865F3-32 3.2V REGULATOR

VOUT

4 DVDD2.7V

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY


NC

16 17 1 15 5 6 7 10 12 13

TO CARD/LI, DC JACK PCB SECTION CARD/LI PCB CN50

B14 A13 A2 A3 A4 A5 A7 A8 A9 A10 B1 B2 B3 B4 B10 B13 A11 A12 B15 A14 A15 B5 B7 B8 B9 B12

CN101 DBI TDI VTR ON SDI DINT SDAO TPC CCM RESET PCST3 PCST2 PCST1 PCST0 DBGE DCLK DRESET SYSRDY TBUSY XRESET TRST TMS PRI TDO TDO TCK DEBCLK DEBUD DEBDD XDEBEN DVDD3.3V DEBCLK DEBUD DEBDD XDEBEN

L5 PAL/IPAL

EADDR MADD21 N14 EADDR MADD22 N15 EDATA M DATA0 N16 EDATA M DATA0 EDATA M DATA1 EDATA M DATA2 EDATA M DATA3 EDATA M DATA4 EDATA M DATA5 EDATA M DATA6 EDATA M DATA7 EDATA M DATA8 EDATA M DATA9 EDATA M DATA10 EDATA M DATA11 EDATA M DATA12 EDATA M DATA13 EDATA M DATA14 EDATA M DATA15 E2 DQ0 H2 DQ1 E3 DQ2 H3 DQ3 H4 DQ4 E4 DQ5 H5 DQ6 E5 DQ7 F2 DQ8 G2 DQ9 F3 DQ10 G3 DQ11 F4 DQ12 G5 DQ13 F5 DQ14 G6 DQ15/A 1 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 E1 D1 C1 A1 B1 D2 C2 A2 B5 A5 C5 D5 B6 A6 C6 D6 E6 B2 C3 EADDR M ADD0 EADDR M ADD1 EADDR M ADD2 EADDR M ADD3 EADDR M ADD4 EADDR M ADD5 EADDR M ADD6 EADDR M ADD7 EADDR M ADD8 EADDR M ADD9 EADDR M ADD10 EADDR M ADD11 EADDR M ADD12 EADDR M ADD13 EADDR M ADD14 EADDR M ADD15 EADDR M ADD16 EADDR M ADD17 EADDR M ADD18 EADDR M ADD19 EADDR M ADD20 Q100 Q101

CARD DAT2 CARD DAT3 CARD CMD CARD CLK CARD DAT0 CARD DAT1

TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN PCB

EADDR M ADD0 EDATA M DATA0 to 15

TO CAMERA SECTION-1 MAIN PCB TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN PCB TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB

D3 SDI DINT D1 SDAO TPC

EDATA M DATA1 N17 EDATA M DATA2 M14 EDATA M DATA3 M16 EDATA M DATA4 M17 EDATA M DATA5 M18 EDATA M DATA6 L14 EDATA M DATA7 L16 EDATA M DATA8 L17 EDATA M DATA9 L18 EDATA M DATA10 K14 EDATA M DATA11 K15 EDATA M DATA12 K16 EDATA M DATA13 K18

LCD BT SW

VOUT

IC105 NJU7700F4-18 RESET IC

C2 PCST3 VDD 2 E 3 + LI D104 VTR UNREG D2 PCST2 E2 PCST1 C1 PCST0 E3 DBGE E1 DCLK F2 DRESET F3 SYSRDY

SW100 SUB MI-COM RESET SW

8 DVDD3.3V STILL POW SW EJECT SW BATT INFO D

RESET

B16 TBUSY

37 P40 22 P13(DVO) 20 P15(INT3) 31 P35(AIN5/STOP3) 27 P31(AIN1) 32 P36(AIN6/STOP4) 33 P37(AIN7/STOP5) 21 P14(PPG) 13 P03(TXD) 12 P02(RXD) 29 P33(AIN3) 28 P32(AIN2) 38 P41 39 P42 41 P44 34 VAREF E3 DET 23 P12(TC1/INT2) 30 P34(AIN4/STOP2) P30(AIN0) 26 VTR UNREG U11 X CAM ON P04(SO) 14 P05(SI) 15 P06(SCK) 16 P11(INT1) 24 P10(PWM3/TC3/PD03) 25 P45 42 P47 44 STOM DATA MTOS DATA STOM SCK MTOS REQ STOM CS MTOS VUP CCM RESET M4 MTOS REQ G5 STOM CS L6 MTOS VUP G1 RESET J1 STOM SCK MTOP/AIF DATA FCH0/DEBUG0 K1 MTOS DATA MTOP/AIF EN PTOM/AIF EN K2 STOM DATA

EDATA M DATA14 J14 EDATA M DATA15 J16 FM XCS G15 FM XRST R12 XERD M H17 XEWRU M H15 MACS XINT1 MACS XINT0 MACS XRST MACS XCS BUS RDY XEWRL M H14 CAM DR SCK CAM DR TXD

TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB

ST TMG

(EJECT SW)

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY

BATT TEMP CAM POW SW VTR POW SW CARD POW SW DC V DET DC J DET A/D V A/D I INIT CHG1 CHARGE VTR ON

FM XCS FM XRST XEWRU M XERD M

F1 CE B4 RESET A4 WE G1 OE

IC103 S29AL008D70BFI02 FLASH

EADDR M ADD0 to 10 EDATA M DATA0 to 15 XEWRL M XERD M LAP XCS LAP XINT CAM DRIVER LD CAM DRIVER SCK CAM DRIVER TXD LAP XRST LAP RDY MTOP REQ PTOM CS MTOP/AIF DATA FCH 0 CAM POW SW VTR POW SW MOT POSI OPEN Z OPEN LOW MOT ON

TO CAMERA SECTION-6 MAIN PCB

NC4 D4 NC3 D3

LAP XINT

LAP XCS

TRST

TMS

L4 A14 T9 F15 C15 N3 LCD BT SW MTOP REQ PTOM CS

P6 P10 T10 U10 H3

A15 B15 P11 H18 D16 E15 C16 G13 D17 H16

IC100 TMP86C847UG SUB MI-COM

TDO

TCK

TDI

TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN PCB

BATT + BATT VTR ON IC3201 DC J DET DC V DET A/D V VTR ON INIT CHG1 CHARGE A/D I E3V E3DET CS X CAM ON CN2900 SUB FCH CN102 EJECT SW MOT POSI MOTOR SIG MOTOR SIG OPEN Z OPEN LOW

CAM DR LD

LAP XRST

IC106 TC7SH08FU(F) AND GATE


1 4 2 LAP RDY

NC

A4

EDATA M DATA0 to 15 EADDR M ADD0 to 22 XEWRL M XEWRU M XERD M TRST TMS TCK MACS XINT0 MACS XINT1 MACS XCS MACS XRST MACS TDO PRI TDO MACS RDY

TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN PCB

TO FPC SECTION SW PCB

2 3 6 7 8 9

ST TMG

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY

01

S e p . 2005

CANON INC. 2005

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL USB SIGNAL

DC10 E, DC20 E

MAIN PCB (7/8)


14 YOUT 13 YSAG 11 VOUT 10 VSAG 8 COUT POWER SAVE 7 XPS Y25 RTS(2) INT(3) HCS(3) CIN 5 AH26 COUT TMS TCK YIN 3 AJ25 YOUT TRST TDO P5V TO FPC SECTION AV FPC 6 3 2 10 8 5 CN2100 V AV R I/O AV L I/O Y C AVS DET Q2121 WIDE CONT AC28 CTS(3) E DATA (0) J28 J29 K26 K27 AVDD1.4V Q2120 LET CONT CN3501 D+ D VBUS AC26 RTS(3) W26 R27 J4 J3 J2 J1 XEINT S XECS3

IC2102 NJM2567V 75OHM DRIVER

IC2300 (3/3) R8A34013BG BACK END

K29 N26 L27 N25 L28 L29 M27 M28 M29

TO FPC SECTION USB FPC

5 3 1

H1

TDI

P26 N27

H5 G3

DBI PLLRST D29 HDREQ(0) N28 HDACK(0) HWS(1) R29 HCS(4) AA28 INT(4)

E DATA (15) EADDR (22) M26 G26 G27 G28 G29 H27 H26 H28 K25 H29 E26 E28 E29 F25 F27 F26 F28 F29 L26 L25 E ADD 1 E ADD 2 DQ0 31 33 35 37 40 42 44 DQ7 46 E DATA 8 E DATA 9 E DATA 10 E DATA 11 E DATA 12 E DATA 13 E DATA 14 E DATA 15 E ADD 3 E ADD 4 E ADD 5 E ADD 6 E ADD 7 E ADD 8 E ADD 9 E ADD 10 E ADD 11 E1 A0 D1 C1 A1 B1 D2 C2 A2 B5 A5 C5 D5 B6 A6 C6 D6 E6 B2 C3 D4 D3 C4 A21 F1 CE G1 OE 11 WE 10 CS1 A4 WE B4 RESET DQ0 E2 H2 E3 H3 H4 E4 H5 E5 F2 J26

P25

U29 NSDARX(0)

NSDATX(0)

W28 SPIDATAI

W27 SCLK(0)

R26 HCS(2)

AB26 CTS(0)

AA27 INT(5)

W29 SPICS

AB28 INT(8)

AA26 RX(2)

AA25 TX(0)

AE28 TX(2)

E25 EADDR (0)

V26 SPICLK

HWS(0)

P27

P28 HCS(0)

RESET

T28

T26

T29

HOE

DEBUG RS232C RX2

DEBUG RS232C TX2

PTOM/AIF DATA

PRI SOUND EN

PTOM/AIF SCK

EVF BL ON

USB DREQ

REC MUTE

USB DACK

USB INT

XRESET

A MUTE

EVF ON

EVF CS

XEWR1

XEWR0

AIF CS

XECS4

XECS2

N.C

B4 B11 B12 B1 A1 A7 A8 B8 B7 B2 B9 B5 B6

CN2900 VTR UNREG RS232C RX2 RS232C TX2 VI/O VI/O EVF R EVF G EVF B EVF COM AC EVF HD EVF COM DC MIC2 MIC3

VTR UNREG

E ADD 0 E ADD 1

27 A0 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 52 19 18 9 A19

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB

E ADD 2 MIC2 MIC3 AV DET TDI DBI XPLLRESET XRESET PTOM/AIF SCK PTOM/AIF DATA SOUND EN SOUND CN2901 EVF COM DC EVF G EVF R EVF B EVF COM AC EVF HD AV R I/O AV L I/O AIF CS XPDI REC MUTE PTOM/AIF SCK PTOM/AIF DATA EVF CS EVF BL ON EVF ON A MUTE SOUND SOUND EN E DATA 0 to 15 B1 D0 C1 D1/AD1 C2 D2/AD2 D1 D3/AD3 D2 D4/AD4 D3 D5/AD5 E1 D6/AD6 E2 D7 VBUS K10 DM H10 DP J10 RST N K8 DREQ1 N B3 INT N K7 RD N A3 WR1 N B2 WR0 N A2 CS N A1 DACK1 N A4 USB DREQ USB INT XERD XEWR0 XEWR1 XECS4 USB DACK E ADD 3 E ADD 4 E ADD 5 E ADD 6 E ADD 7 E ADD 8 E ADD 9 E ADD 10 E ADD 11 E ADD 12 E ADD 13 E ADD 14

XECS0

XERD

XPDI

E DATA 0 E DATA 1 E DATA 2 E DATA 3 E DATA 4 E DATA 5 E DATA 6 E DATA 7 E DATA 8 E DATA 9 E DATA 10 E DATA 11 E DATA 12 E DATA 13 E DATA 14 E DATA 15

TO CAMERA SECTION-5 SUB PCB CN2905

A15 B2 B3 B4 A16 B16 A4 A2 B8 B13 B11 B10 B9 B17 B14 B15 A14 A7 B7

F1 D8 F2 D9 G1 D10 G2 D11 G3 D12 H1 D13 H2 D14 J2 D15 E ADD 1 to 6 K2 A1 J6 A2 K6 A3 J5 A4 K5 A5 K3 A6/ALE

IC2301 R1LV1616RSD-55I SRAM

E ADD 12 E ADD 13 E ADD 14 E ADD 15 E ADD 16 E ADD 17 E ADD 18 E ADD 19 E ADD 20 E ADD 21 E ADD 22

IC2303 S29PL064J60BFI12 FLASH

G2 F3 G3 F4 G5 F5 DQ15 G6

IC3500 RBA01013LG USB IC

VIFA1 H5 VIFA2 E3 VIFB1 C6 VIFB2 F8 AFED33V 1 H9 AFED33V 2 K9 AFED33V 3 J4 AFEA15V J7 VDD1 F3 VDD2 C5 VDD3 E8

DVDD2.7V

E ADD 15 E ADD 16 E ADD 17 E ADD 18

USB VOLT

E ADD 19 E ADD 20

47 DQ15

DVDD1.4V 30 OE

J27

G5

4 E3 + LI TO CAMERA SECTION-6 MAIN PCB 5

OUTY VCC

IC2302 TC7SZ126FU BUFFER

G INA

1 2

PRI TDO TRST XEINT S XECS3 TCK TMS E DATA 8 to 15 E ADD 0 to 2 XERD XEWR0

TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN PCB

XRESET

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

POWER SUPPLY SECTION


MAIN PCB(8/8)
Power for Battery Power for DC JACK Battery charge DC20 A,DC20 E,DM-DC20 ONLY
FU3200

DC10 E, DC20 E
ST UNREG

FU3205 FU3203 D1801 FU3201 FU3202 FU3204

FE UNREG 1 FE UNREG 2

36 CTL 7 35 CTL 6 34 OSC 23 CH1 33 TO CARD/LI,DC JACK PCB SECTION DC JACK PCB 2 3 4 5 1 CN3200 DC + DC + DC DC JACK DET 32 CTL FU1800 Q1802 2 5 4 31 VCC1 48 VCC2 1 3 74 VCCO1 75 VCCO2 65 OUT 9 62 VCC3 A/DI TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB DC J DET DC V DET VTR ON VTR ON IC3201 A/D I CHARGE INIT CHG1 ST TMG E3DET CS E3V PANEL BL CTRL LCD BL VFB X CAM ON A/D V 59 OUTC 9 SDRAM2.5V CHARGE 4 Q1803 5 6 7 8 3 2 1 INIT CHG1 64 CHRG CTL1 63 CHRG CTL2 CH2 70 2 LPF LPF HTG2.7V CAM2.7V Q3201 1.4V (CH2) 5 4 22 LPF AA 2.7V 69 Q3205 DVDD 2.5V DDR2.5V 1 3 LPF 68 2 DVDD 1.4V MACS1.4V AVDD1.4V Q3203 1.2V (CH1) LPF 5 4 PRISM 1.2V VTR UNREG

TO CAMERA SECTION-2 MAIN PCB

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY ST TMG

47 CS OUT2 61 + INC9 Q3211 60 INC9 71

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY

DVDD2.7V PLL2.7V AVDD2.7V

E3DET CS LCD BL VFB BATT + BATT PANEL BL CTRL E3V

46 CS OUT 1 4 3 INA + INA CH7 2 9 Q3206 2.5V (CH7) 78

51 VOUT 3

V IN

IC3203 NJM2865F3-46 V OUT 4.6V REGULATOR

AA4.7V

CHARGE

TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN PCB

LCD BL POW LCD BL ON Q3200 2 6 1 5 3 4

8 CH8 80 CH5 2 13 Q3202 2.7V (CH5) 76 29 RT USB VOLT 5 4 LCD3.3V FLASH SRAM3.3V DVDD3.3V 4 AVDD3.3V 1 3 LPF P 5V LCD 5V

Q1804

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY

37 Q1801 16 CH4

3 5

V IN

IC3200 NJM2881F31 V OUT 3.1V REGULATOR

Q3213 P5V (CH4) 73 2

CAM3.5V

17

USB VOLT LCD3.3V

19 CH3 Q3204 3.45V (CH3) (DM-DC20) Q3204 3.3V (CH3) (DM-DC10) 5 2

FLASH SRAM3.3V DVDD3.3V 4 AVDD3.3V CAM3.3V

DC10 A DC10 E DM-DC10 ONLY

18

72

IC3201 MB44A126 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

12 T3201 CH6 Q3207 3 2 1 4 77 5 6 7 D3202 8 CCD 15V D3203 CCD 7V

DC20 A DC20 E DM-DC20 ONLY


Q3208

D3201 LCD 8.5V

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

FLASH PCB SECTION (DC20 A,DC20 E,DM-DC20 ONLY)

DC10 E, DC20 E

FLASH PCB

CN501 Xe( + ) Xe( )

2 1

TO XENON

Q502

TP501 TP502

T501

CN502 T( + ) T( )

2 1

TO TRIGER COIL

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN103

1 2 7 10 11 12 8 9

CN500 P5V P5V ST VDHGL ST UNREG ST UNREG ST UNREG ST TMG ST EFCHG

Q504 P5V P5V P5V 3 VCC

16 VBAT SW2 SW1 2 1

4 F ON Q501 10 CHG G IGBT 6 Q503

IC501 TPS65552RGT DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

LCD PCB SECTION


DATA COMMUNICATION

DC10 E, DC20 E

LCD PCB
LCD 5V Q903 VCC 5V

LCD 3.3V

5 Q901

V IN

IC903 NJM2865F3 V OUT 2.8V REGULATOR

WP4201

BACKLIGHT

LCD 8.5V VCC 5V LCD 5V LCD 3.3V 5 VCC1-1 18 VDD1 29 VDD2 36 VCC2

CN901 7 8 9 10 1 20 21 22 17 16 15 6 5 4 3 2 23 LCD 8.5V LCD 5V LCD 3.3V LCD 3.3V LCD ON LCD BL POW LCD BL POW LCD BL VFB R OUT(R-Y) G OUT(Y) B OUT(B-Y) LCD CS LCD EE CS TX1 DAT SCLK1 RX1 SIN LCD BT SW

43 VCC1-2 R OUT 34 45 R/R-Y G OUT 35 44 G/Y B OUT LCS ECS SO CLK SO E CS CLK SO SO 1 2 3 4 CS SK DI DO 46 B/B-Y 33 CN902 VDD RED GREEN BLUE VST VCK EN DWN XSTBY PCG HST WIDE HCK2 HCK1 RGT REF COM CS PSIG 18 4 5 3 22 21 20 19 14 13 12 9 8 7 2 11 24 23 6

VST 24 VCK 23

TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN PCB CN901

IC901 BR9010RFV-W EEPROM

VCC

LCD 3.3V

IC902 CXM3009TQ LCD DRIVER

EN

22

DWN 21 XSTB 20 PCG 19 HST 17 WIDE 16 HCK2 15

LCD UNIT LCD

L CS CLK SO

6 7 8

SEN SCK SDAT

HCK1 14 RGT 13 REF 42 COM-DC POF PSIG OUT 38 37

TO LCD DETECT FPC ASS'Y

CN903 LCD BT SW

26

LCD 8.5V Q904

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

CARD/LI, DC JACK PCB SECTION


Battery charge Power for DC JACK

DC10 E, DC20 E

CARD/LI PCB
CN50 CARD DAT2 CARD DAT3 CARD CMD CARD CLK CARD DAT0 CARD DAT1 CARD DET CARD VDD LI POW( + ) LI POW( + ) CN51 DAT2 CD/DAT3 CMD VDD CLK DAT0 DAT1 CARD DET

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN105

12 11 10 7 5 4 1 2 16 17

BAT50

9 1 2 4 5 7 8 12

mini SD CARD

DC JACK PCB
TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN PCB CN3200 DC DC JACK DET DC + DC + CN3200

DC JACK

01

Sep. 2005

CANON INC. 2005

FPC SECTION
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL USB SIGNAL Battery charge Power for Battery

DC10 E, DC20 E

RKEY FPC
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN104 A7 A6 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 A12 A13 A14 CN100 KEY AD0 KEY AD1 PANEL OPEN SW BATT BATT BATT BATT BATT BATT BATT BATT BATT + BATT + BATT + BATT + BATT + BATT + BATT + BATT TEMP BATT INFO D BATT INFO B + SW103 STOP TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN102

SW FPC
MOTOR SIG MOTOR SIG EJECT SW MOT POSI OPEN Z OPEN LOW

AV FPC
CN2 AV L I/O V AV DET AV R I/O C Y CN2100 L V SW R C Y

E10

SW104 PLAY

SW10 TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION MAIN PCB CN2100 ZD10 SW11

2 6 5 3 8 10

1 6 5 3 8 10

AV JACK

SW105 FF

SW101 DISP SW12

SW106 REW

SW13

FRONT FPC

SW107 FINA

SW108 B.C

SW102 W.TV TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN106 RMC IN P5V P5V WHITE LED WHITE LED LED1 ZD3700 BATT BATT + BATT TEMP BATT INFO D BATT INFO B + 1 2

RU1

REMOTE CONTROL L ER

SW100

BATTERY TERMINAL

REAR KEY FPC

USB FPC
VBUS D D+ CN30 VBUS ( + 5V) D D+ 1 2 3

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN108

CHAR CARD ACC LED VTR UNREG P5V DIRECT P LED KEY AD2 KEY AD3 CARD POW SW STILL POW SW

LED101

LED100

TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION MAIN PCB CN3501

USB JACK

ZD101 SW101 DIRECT PRT

SW102 FUNC

SW104 CROSS SW RIGHT

AE FPC
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN PCB CN107 MODE D AD1(SCN) MODE D AD0(P)

SW103 SW30 ZD30

SW100 MENU

01

S e p . 2005

CANON INC. 2005

You might also like